Apr 18, 2024  
College Catalog 2021-2022 
    
College Catalog 2021-2022 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Descriptions/Official Course Syllabi


  

 

Culinary Arts

  
  • CULH 1320 - International Kitchen

    Credit Hours: 5.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1050 , CULH 1155 , and CULH 1310 

    (formerly CULH 1330)

    CULH 1320 involves the study of international foods and food culture. Students will prepare a variety of international dishes using standardized recipes in the commercial kitchen of our signature restaurant. Students will utilize the geographical spices that influence various regions of the world. Students cook under the direction of a chef-instructor.

    Billable Contact Hours: 8

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize safety and sanitation practices when preparing, cooking, and serving all food items in the professional kitchen.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain food safety guidelines and how they relate to hands-on food preparation.
    2. Explain personal hygiene guidelines, hand washing, hair restraint, jewelry.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply proper sanitary procedures for all food items when cooling, storing, labeling, dating, and reheating food.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain appropriate methods used to properly cool various foods.
    2. Explain how to properly store various foods in order to eliminate the risk of contamination.
    3. Explain how to properly date and label food for storage.
    4. Explain how to properly reheat food to ensure appropriate temperature.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate how to maximize food freshness, quality, safety, and sanitation when serving hot foods and cold foods.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how to maintain fresh food in relation to timely serviceability.
    2. Explain potential food safety issues related to serving hot and cold foods.
    3. Explain food time and temperatures concerns.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction
    2. Terms and Organization
    3. Prep
    4. France - Northern/Restaurant Opens
    5. France - Southern
    6. Germany
    7. Italy - Northern
    8. Italy - Southern
    9. Spain
    10. Morocco/North Africa
    11. Greece/Cypress
    12. Middle East
    13. Poland
    14. Czech Republic
    15. Scandinavia/Russia
    16. Hong Kong/China
    17. Japan
    18. India
    19. Central America
    20. South America
    21. Canada
    22. America - Eastern
    23. America - Northern
    24. America - Southern
    25. America - Western
    26. Clean-up and Close -down
    27. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 1340 - Production Baking

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: CULH 1155 

    CULH 1340 gives students an understanding of baking, how breads and baked goods are produced, and teach the methods and skills used in this trade. Students learn to effectively produce a variety of breads, cakes, pies, and cookies.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1340.1:
    Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to accurately demonstrate the scaling techniques used in baking.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    2. Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    Outcome 1340.2:
    Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to accurately use various ingredients used in baking to present a finished product.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify ingredients used in baking.
    2. List function of various ingredients used in baking.
    3. Define and describe the properties of various ingredients used in baking.

    Outcome 1340.3:
    Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate the quality of quick and yeast breads.

    Objectives:

    1. Prepare quick and yeast breads.
    2. Define the steps and mixing methods used for quick and yeast breads.
    3. Describe the steps and mixing methods used for quick and yeast breads.

    Outcome 1340.4
    Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate éclair paste.

    Objectives:

    1. Prepare éclair paste.
    2. Define the procedure and steps used for making éclair paste.
    3. Explain the process for making éclair paste.
    4. Describe the procedure and steps used to make éclair paste.

    Outcome 1340.5:
    Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate a variety of cookies.

    Objectives:

    1. Prepare a variety of cookies.
    2. Define the different types of cookies and their mixing methods.
    3. Describe a variety of cookie mixing methods.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1. Review syllabus/Course overview/Equipment review
    Week 2. The basics of baking and ingredients/Sanitation
    Week 3. Cheesecakes/Test #1
    Week 4. Quick breads
    Week 5. Yeast breads week 1
    Week 6. Yeast breads week 2
    Week 7. Laminated yeast doughs
    Week 8. Puff pastry dough
    Week 9. Choux paste/ Midterm exam
    Week 10. Cookies Week 11. Pies
    Week 12. Cake layers/ Test #3
    Week 13. Cake decorating week 1
    Week 14. Cake decorating week 2
    Week 15. Practical exam Group 1
    Week 16. Practical exam group 2/Final exam all class
    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 1420 - Purchasing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    CULH 1420 acquaints students with aspects of food and non-food purchasing for a quantity food operation. Upon successful exam completion, students may earn a certificate through the National Restaurant Association ManageFirst(TM) program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the flow of goods in a foodservice operation.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply various ordering procedures
    2. Implement proper receiving techniques
    3. Issue goods and services

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop specifications for food, beverage, and non-food items.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine quality needs of a foodservice operation
    2. Create product specifications
    3. Apply ordering, receiving, and storage techniques

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify dry, refrigerated, and frozen foods used in a commercial kitchen.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine quality checks for receiving
    2. Practice inventory control techniques
    3. Organize placement of goods in storage

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize factors that affect food prices, menu costs, and quality.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze market fluctuation
    2. Identify seasonality
    3. Calculate product availability
    4. Explain supply and demand.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define proper sanitation procedures that affect receiving, storing and issuing of goods in a foodservice operation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain HACCP guidelines
    2. Implement accurate product storage temperatures
    3. Organize food and non-food products per instruction of governmental regulatory agencies

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain regulations for inspections and grading of food products.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe USDA categorization and criteria for grading
    2. Define quality variances in adherence to governmental grading

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to practice inventory management and control procedures

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the importance of a par system when ordering, receiving, and storing food
    2. Define the terms FIFO and LIFO
    3. Maintain proper storage procedures.
    4. Implement methods to deter theft and spoilage

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction and Overview of the Purchasing Function
    2. Overview of the Purchasing Function
    3. Planning the Purchasing Function
    4. Ordering, Receiving and Storage Procedures
    5. Produce, Convenience, Processed and Dairy Foods
    6. Eggs and Poultry
    7. Fresh Meats and Seafood
    8. Beverages and Non-Food Services
    9. F.F.E. and Review
    10. NRA Test
    11. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Pusta, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 1440 - Beverage Service

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly CULH 2911)

    CULH 1440 involves a study of conditions that will confront the professional supervisor or manager in an establishment that serves beverages. This introductory class touches on wine, beer, spirits, and nonalcoholic beverages. It also covers purchasing, controls, equipment needs, and regulations. An additional fee is required for ServSafe(TM) Alcohol Awareness Training and Certification.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define local, state, and federal laws pertaining to the purchase and service of alcoholic beverages.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the effects of the Dram Shop Act on foodservice operations.
    2. Implement methods to control excessive consumption by guests
    3. Recognize signs of intoxication by guests

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify standards of service for alcoholic and nonalcoholic beverages.

    Objectives:

    1. Practice portion control
    2. Maintain consistency of standard operating procedures
    3. Determine equipment, glassware, and garnish for preparation and service

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline opening and closing procedures of a beverage operation.

    Objectives:

    1. Adhere to local, state, and federal sanitation regulations
    2. Implement mise en place practices
    3. Streamline work and traffic flow

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Class
    2. Brief History of Beverages
    3. Overview of Beverages Today and Over Last Two Decades
    4. Types of Beverage operations
      1. Bar Equipment
      2. Bar Set Up and Close
      3. Liquors
      4. Wine
      5. Wine Service
      6. Beer
    5. COVID-19 Service Training

    Primary Faculty
    Pusta, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 1600 - Ice Carving & Design

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (replaces but does not equate to CULH 1500)

    This course will introduce and train the student in the art of ice carving. Through the use of lectures, visual aids, and blocks of ice, the student will develop the skills necessary to carve selected sculptures. With extensive “hands-on” experience, each student will design, plan and carve ice sculptures.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify ice sculpting tools.

    Objectives: The student will :

    1. Differentiate between tools and apply their specific use.
    2. Organize tools in separate areas based on their shape and use.
    3. Explain the use of power tool cords.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain techniques used to store tools properly.

    Objectives: The student will :

    1. Identify which tools need to be dried before storage.
    2. Describe the procedure to dry and care for tools.
    3. Demonstrate proper storage techniques.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safety techniques while ice carving.

    Objectives: The student will :

    1. Explain how to hold sharpened tools properly.
    2. Choose the best way to handle sharpened chisels.
    3. Assemble a tool table according to safety standards.
    4. Demonstrate safe use of tools.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to draw templates of ice sculptures to specified proportions.

    Objectives: The student will :

    1. Reproduce a picture on template paper.
    2. Calculate the correct size to draw a sculpture.
    3. Practice drawing with an overhead projector.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to carve simple ice sculptures.

    Objectives: The student will :

    1. Demonstrate the carving of a picture previously drawn.
    2. Carve geometric shapes.
    3. Design a sculpture using a template that was drawn.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Review syllabus, Safety, Tool Identification and use
    2. Drawing templates, Sharpening tools, Tool use on Ice
    3. Use of power tools and Chisels
    4. Carving of a table-top sculpture
    5. Carving a half block sculpture
    6. Design, plan, draw, and start to carve a single block sculpture
    7. Finish the single block sculpture.
    8. Final Sculpture and Judging a sculpture

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2005 - Principles of Menu & Event Planning

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: HTMT 1900  

    (replaces but does not equate to CULH 1430 and CULH 2050)

    This course will outline the managing principles of proper menu and event planning.  Teach important factors and considerations to properly plan a menu and executing a function with success. Detail the various types of menus and the important considerations that must be applied when writing menu and properly planning for an event.  Identify potential factors that can apply to food, labor, and equipment use when planning menus and events.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design and layout a menu following basic menu principals.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic menu principles.
    2. Describe the various types of menus and explain when and how they are to be used.
    3. Create menu descriptions following established “truth-in-menu” guidelines.
    4. Develop a menu layout for a foodservice operation to include an example of a cyclical, a la carte, prix-fixe, table d’ hote, and buffet.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to determine menu prices using the percentage or factor methods in order to determine industry standard food costs.

    Objectives

    1. Explain the importance of product mix, check average, and the impact on profit contribution.
    2. Determine food, labor cost and equipment use when determining menu item placement, flow of the operation, and successful manageability of the foodservice operation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will apply principles of nutrition when developing recipes and menu choices to include labeling laws that address allergies and raw food.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the rationale for a seasonal menu and analyze how it may affect the overall menu costs, food quality, and availability.
    2. Discuss menu-planning resources to include internet, professional sources, vendors, and food service associations.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline the process for planning, organizing, and executing an event on and off premise.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the considerations for local licensing that may apply for both on and off premise functions.
    2. Discuss the planning required for all types of functions on and off premise.
    3. Discuss the organization and logistics for on and off site functions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Menu Planning Principals
    2. Menu Development , cyclical, al a carte, prix-fixe, table d’ hote, and buffet
    3. Consideration of menu layout
    4. “Truth-in-menu”
    5. Determining food, labor equipment needs and costs
    6. Menu Planning resources - internet, vendors
    7. Product mix, check averages, profit contribution
    8. Seasonal Menus - local food sourcing
    9. Licensing considerations
    10. Considerations for on-off premise functions

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2015 - A la Carte Dining

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155 , CULH 1255 , and CULH 1310 

    (formerly CULH 2010)

    Students rotate through assigned stations in our signature restaurant. They perform duties in the back and the front of the house. This includes applying American, Russian, and French table service styles in the dining room, as well as preparing items from an a la carte menu. Upon successful exam completion, students may earn a certificate through the National Restaurant Association ManageFirst (TM) program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to cook foods tableside in the dining room at a salable level.

    Objectives:

    A. Assemble ingredients and equipment required to cook foods tableside.

    B. Cook foods tableside.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to cook foods to order in the kitchen from a given standardized recipe.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose the appropriate ingredients and equipment to successfully produce a salable plate of food.
    2. Prepare foods according to the recipe.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate compliance with sanitation standards required by the Macomb County Health Department.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and follow all food code guidelines as described by the Macomb County Health Department with 100% accuracy.
    2. Conduct a self-evaluation of the sanitation and safety practices.
    3. Demonstrate the ability to date and label food according to health code requirements.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will successfully pass the NRAEF (National Restaurant Association Educational Foundation) Hospitality and Restaurant Management test.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Review of American service standards
    2. Practical application of Russian and French service
    3. A la Carte cooking procedures
    4. Settingup a production cooking station
    5. Sanitation standards in an a la carte kitchen
    6. Production of menu items
    7. NRAEF Hospitality and Restaurant Management

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2025 - Wine Appreciation

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    CULH 2025 introduces the learner to fundamental wine concepts, tasting, and how grapes are grown. It covers wine and food compatibility, wines of the new world, wines of the old world, other types of wine, and wine management.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the basics of wine.

    Objectives:

    1. Classify wines according to type and recognize their distinguishing styles and classification methods.
    2. Identify the major elements within the grapegrowing and wine making processes.
    3. Distinguish between different grape varieties, their major location of production, and their unique personalities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate basic knowledge of food and wine pairing.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply winetasting assessment techniques for table, fortified, and sparkling wines.
    2. Apply the analytical approach to wine and food pairing.
    3. Identify specific food types with their respective pairing strategies.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate knowledge of new world and old world wine philosophies.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the philosophies of major wine producing areas of America and Canada.
    2. Provide basic philosophical identities to new world wines including Chile, Argentina, Australia, New Zealand, and South Africa .
    3. Provide basic philosophical identities to old world wines including France, Italy, Germany, and Spain.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify management principals of wine.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify elements within each control point throughout the flow of wine.
    2. Demonstrate fundamental opening and serving techniques.
    3. List different variables needed to arrange and compile an effective wine menu.
    4. Identify a vocabulary of wine terminology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Wine
      1. basic fundamentals of wine
      2. how wine is categorized
      3. how to begin to demystify the world of wine
    2. Wine Tasting
      1. process of tasting and how to use the tasting process
      2. how to analyze wine and understand performance factors
    3. Viticulture and Ecology
      1. process of growing grapes and how to use to make wine
      2. different growing and production techniques
      3. how wine is effected by different growing and production techniques
    4. Performance Factors of Grape Varietals
      1. performance factors of the worlds; most important wine grapes
      2. explore detailed wine pairings strategies that are suitable for each grape
      3. other significant white and red grape varietals
    5. Foundations to Wine and Food Pairing
      1. the process of effectively pairing wine with food
      2. how to minimize poor matches by using the analytical approach and the other pairing principles
    6. Advance Wine and Food Pairing
      1. different types of food, from meat to seafood and food courses from appetizers to entrees
      2. illustrate pairing principals that can provide an effective and enjoyable food and wine experience
    7. Wines of the United States and Canada
      1. wines from most significant regions of United States including California, New York, Washington, and Oregon
      2. wines from Canada
    8. Other New World Wines
      1. new world significant wine producing countries: Argentina, Australia, Chile, New Zealand, South Africa
    9. Wines of France
      1. wines from the most significant regions: Alsace, Bordeaux, Burgundy, Loire Valley, Rhone Valley, Southern France
    10. Other Old World Wine Countries
      1. philosophies and major regions within the significant old world wine countries such as Italy, Germany, and Spain
    11. Sparkling Wine
      1. sparkling wines of the world
      2. production process and different styles
    12. Fortified Wine
      1. famous fortified wines of the world
      2. Madeiras, Sherrys, Ports
    13. Nectar Dessert Wines
      1. famous dessert wines
      2. production and processes’ available
      3. dessert categories and potential pairings, chocolate
    14. The Flow of Wine
      1. the responsibilities of the wine manager
      2. how control can be exercised throughout the flow of wine
      3. how to maximize revenue and cost control
    15. Developing a Menu
      1. foundational consideration when developing a menu
    16. Wine Glossary
      1. terminology from A to Z

    Primary Faculty
    Pusta, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2035 - Nutritional Cooking

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155  and CULH 1310  

    CULH 2035 addresses the highly demanding market of hospital, assisted living, institutional, and personal cooking. Students explore nutritional food preparation methods and techniques in one of the fastest growing sectors of the culinary field.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify food nutrients.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify basic nutrients and their functions.
    2. Distinguish the difference between macronutrients and micronutrients.
    3. Identify the impact of food and nutrition on human performance.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate basic nutritional standards in food preparation.

    Objectives:

    1. Given various assignments, demonstrate the ability to work in a commercial kitchen and follow nutritional recipes under the supervision of a chef-instructor.
    2. Given standardized recipes, produce healthy foods without over-utilizing ingredients that should not be used in excess.
    3. Given an unhealthy recipe, substitute healthier alternatives.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to comply with sanitation standards required by the Macomb County Health Department.

    Objectives:

    1. Follow all food code guidelines as described by the Macomb County Health Department with 100% accuracy.
    2. Conduct a self-evaluation of the sanitation and safety practices.
    3. Accurately date and label food according to health code requirements.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Aspects of Nutrition
      1. Nutrients and their characteristics
      2. Nutrient functions
      3. Macronutrients
      4. Micronutrients
    2. Impact of Food and Nutrition on Human Performance
      1. Digestion, absorption and metabolism
      2. Energy balance
      3. Current dietary recommendations
    3. Cooking Principles and Nutrition
      1. Cooking techniques and their impact on nutrients
      2. Recipes and alternative techniques
      3. Recipes and alternative ingredients
    4. Soups and Salads
      1. Preparation of soups utilizing nutritious options
      2. Preparation of salads and salad dressings
      3. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious soups and salads
    5. Chicken and Poultry
      1. Preparation of poultry items utilizing nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious poultry items
    6. Red Meat and Alternative Meats
      1. Preparation of beef, lamb, pork, and veal utilizing nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious red and alternative meats
    7. Seafood
      1. Preparation of seafood utilizing nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious seafood items
    8. Vegetarian Cuisine
      1. Preparation of vegetarian items using nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious vegetarian items
    9. Mediterranean and other multicultural cuisines
      1. Preparation of multicultural food items utilizing nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious multicultural food items
    10. Healthy Desserts
      1. Preparation of dessert items utilizing nutritious options
      2. Culinary skills, terminology, and methods used to prepare nutritious dessert items

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2040 - Garde Manger

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1050 , CULH 1155 , and CULH 1310  

    CULH 2040 presents the artistic and decorative side of food preparation. Students are introduced to pâtés, hors d’oeuvres, canapés, aspics, marinations, brines, smoking, food sculpturing, and various decorative buffet presentations.

    Billable Contact Hours: 5

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce several types of soups and sauces.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify cold soups and sauces used in the Garde Manger area of a foodservice establishment.
    2. Use a food processor and blender.
    3. Analyze and evaluate the quality of soups and sauces produced in conjunction with the foods served.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce an assortment of sandwiches.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the history and defining characteristics of the sandwich, as well as the most popular modern variations.
    2. Describe the techniques used in maintaining quality of ingredients and preparation methods used to ensure freshness when producing a sandwich.
    3. Produce both hot and cold varieties of sandwiches.
    4. Assess and evaluate the quality of sandwiches produced.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create displays with fruit, cheese, and vegetables.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate proficiency using knives and garnishing tools to achieve professional quality results when producing vegetable and/or fruit carvings.
    2. Produce an attractive fruit, cheese, and vegetable tray using form and functionality.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform various food preservation techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the history and technical importance of curing, brining, pickling, and smoking in preserving foods to maintain flavor, quality, and sanitation.
    2. Produce various types of pickled, smoked, and cured items that represent the Garde Manger pantry.
    3. Assess and evaluate the quality of items produced.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce Forcemeats and Aspic.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the various types of forcemeats including sausage, pâté, terrine, and mousse.
    2. Produce an assortment of sausages using casings and free form.
    3. Produce a variety of pâtés, mousses, and/or terrines to include vegetables and proteins.
    4. Utilize different types of binders in the process of making a forcemeat to include aspic, panadà, or other binding agent.
    5. Utilize aspic as a form of garnish or binder in a salad, pâté, or canapé.
    6. Assess and evaluate the quality of items produced.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare various categories of cheese.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe, identify, and evaluate the various categories of cheese and include several types and names of cheese associated with each category.
    2. Identify the largest cheese producing areas of the United States and other parts of the world.
    3. Describe how best to use various types of cheese and utilize cheese in a recipe.
    4. Assess and evaluate the quality of items produced.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. The Professional Gardé Manager
    2. Cold Sauces and Cold Soups
    3. Salads
    4. Sandwiches
    5. Cured and Smoked Foods
    6. Sausage
    7. Terrines, Pates Galantine, and Roulades
    8. Cheese
    9. Appetizers and Hors d’oeuvres
    10. Condiments, Crackers, and Pickles
    11. Buffets
    12. Final

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2080 - Wedding Cakes

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155  and CULH 1340  with grade C or better and a ServSafe certificate

    (formerly CULH 2915)

    CULH 2080 gives students an overall appreciation and understanding of wedding cakes. Students learn to effectively create different styles of wedding cakes using many techniques in a cost and time effective way. The class is not geared toward food competition, but toward putting these techniques in practice for the real world.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    COURSE OUTCOME:

    2080.1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to demonstrate the scaling techniques used in baking.
    Objective: Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    Objective: Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    2080.2- Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate different types of icings.
    Objective: Prepare a variety of icings. Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of different icings.
    Objective: Explain the process used in the preparation of different icings.
    Objective: Describe the variety of different icings.

    2080.3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate buttercream style wedding cakes.
    Objective: Decorate a buttercream wedding cake.
    Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of buttercream style wedding cakes.
    Objective: Describe the steps in the preparation of buttercream style wedding cakes.

    2080.4: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate fondant style wedding cakes.
    Objective: Prepare a fondant style wedding cake.
    Objective: Explain the fondant making process. Objective: Define a variety of fondant decorating techniques.
    Objective: Describe a variety of fondant decorating techniques.

    2080.5: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate flowers prepared from an edible medium.
    Objective: Prepare flowers from an edible medium.
    Objective: Describe the different mediums and techniques used to make flowers.
    Objective: Define the different mediums and techniques used to make flowers.

    2080.6: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to produce a wedding cake as a final project.
    Objective: produce a wedding cake in the time allotted.
    Objective: List and describe the different components of the wedding cake.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week

    1. Review syllabus, course overview, wedding cake general information
    2. Butter cream basics/Icing
    3. Butter cream decorating styles, borders
    4. Butter cream baking/Test #1
    5. Butter cream flowers
    6. Butter cream cake
    7. Midterm/ Fondant/homework assignment due
    8. Fondant/Flowers
    9. Fondant dummy cake/Flowers
    10.  Fondant Australian lace/Embroidery piping
    11. Fondant/Baking/Drapes
    12. Fondant/Test #3
    13. Student Choice
    14. Final wedding cake project
    15. Final wedding cake project
    16. Final exam/Clean up

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2085 - The Art of Sculpted Cakes

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155  and CULH 1340  all with grade C or better and a ServSafe certificate

    CULH 2085 introduces students to advanced cake decorating techniques used to create edible cake sculptures. Students learn to create the proper base and support structure as well as to create different styles of sculpted cakes.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to maintain the Macomb County Health Department Standards.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify in writing sanitation rules.
    2. Maintain the sanitation standards throughout the course of the semester.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to identify the procedure and create the proper structure for their creations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the “food safe” elements needed to build structure.
    2. Using these elements, create a structure for a cake creation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to design and create a cake sculpture of their choice.

    Objectives:

    1. Design a cake sculpture for the final project.
    2. Create the proper support and structure for the final project.
    3. Execute the cake sculpture and be graded as a handson Project

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1:

    1. Syllabus review
    2. Sanitation review
    3. Power point presentation on sculpted cakes
    4. Review and discuss cakes and icing techniques
    5. “How To” for cake supports

    Week 2:

    1. Bake cake layers
    2. Start purse/bag handle and shoes

    Week 3:

    1. Make icing and fondant
    2. Complete purse/bag and shoes

    Week 4:

    1. Demonstrate rounds
    2. Make carved pumpkin cake

    Week 5:

    1. Homework due for final project
    2. Create “sculpted dog” cake

    Week 6:

    1. Create structure for Dinosaur or Person cake sculpture
    2. Execute Dinosaur or Person cake sculpture

    Week 7:

    1. Bake all required layers for icing
    2. Make icing and fondant
    3. Create support structure for final project

    Week 8:

    1. Create final project

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2100 - Centerpieces

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly CULH 2914)

    CULH 2100 gives students an overall appreciation and understanding of centerpieces used for displays. Students learn how to create gum paste and cast sugar centerpieces in a cost effective way to make them saleable for parties, sweet tables, weddings, etc. Many of the techniques learned may be used for pastry competitions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    COURSE OUTCOME:

    2100.1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to accurately demonstrate the scaling techniques used in preparation of sugar centerpieces.
    Objective: Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    Objective: Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    2100.2- Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate pastillage and royal icing in a sugar creation.
    Objective: Use pastillage and royal icing to prepare sugar creations.
    Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of pastillage and royal icing.
    Objective: Explain the process used in the preparation of pastillage and royal icing.

    2100.3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate cast sugar centerpieces. Objective: Prepare a variety of cast sugar centerpieces.
    Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of cast sugar centerpieces.
    Objective: Describe the steps in the preparation of cast sugar centerpieces.

    2100.4: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate pulled and blown sugar centerpieces. Objective: Prepare pulled and blown sugar centerpieces.
    Objective: Explain the pulled and blown sugar making process.
    Objective: Define a variety of pulled and blown sugar techniques. Objective: Describe a variety of pulled and blown sugar techniques.

    2100.5: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to evaluate flowers prepared from an edible medium.
    Objective: Prepare flowers from an edible medium.
    Objective: Describe the different mediums and techniques used to make flowers.
    Objective: Define the different mediums and techniques used to make flowers.

    2100.6: Upon completion of this course, a student will be able to produce a sugar showpiece as a final project.
    Objective: produce a sugar showpiece in the time allotted.
    Objective: List and describe the different components of the sugar showpiece.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week

    1. Review Syllabus, ingredient review
    2. Recipe review/Mold and Support making/Pastillage
    3. Pastillage centerpiece - Valentine theme - Homework
    4. Centerpiece design and Pastillage pieces/Test #1
    5. Centerpiece design and Pastillage
    6. Centerpiece design and Cast sugar techniques - Video #1
    7. Centerpiece design and Cast sugar techniques - Easter Theme
    8. Centerpiece design, Cast sugar - Midterm Exam
    9. Centerpiece design and Pulled sugar techniques
    10. Centerpiece design and Pulled sugar techniques - Video #2
    11. Centerpiece design and Pulled sugar techniques
    12. Student final projects/Test #3
    13. Centerpiece for Feast
    14. Centerpiece for Feast
    15. Students final projects
    16. Final Exam and clean up

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2120 - Chocolate Creations

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 2180 

    CULH 2120 gives students an overall appreciation and understanding of chocolate work. Students will learn to use chocolate and create candies, fillings, centerpieces, molds, and decorations. Many of the techniques learned may be used for pastry competitions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    COURSE OUTCOME:

    2120.1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to demonstrate the scaling techniques used in preparation of chocolate creations.
    Objective: Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    Objective: Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    2120.2: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate chocolate made from scratch. ( Bean to bar)
    Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of B2B chocolate.
    Objective: Explain the process used in the preparation of B2B chocolate.
    Objective: Prepare confection using the B2B chocolate made in class.
    Objective: Define and describe the different types of chocolate and origin.

    2120.3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate chocolate decorations.
    Objective: Prepare a variety of chocolate decorations.
    Objective: Define and describe the steps in the preparation of chocolate decorations.

    2120.4: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate chocolate centerpieces.
    Objective: Prepare chocolate centerpieces.
    Objective: Explain the process for making chocolate centerpieces.
    Objective: Define a variety of chocolate techniques used in the centerpiece making process.
    Objective: Describe a variety of chocolate techniques used in the centerpiece making process.

    2120.5: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate a variety of fillings and candies.
    Objective: Prepare various fillings and candies.
    Objective: Discuss methods of preparation and finishing techniques for various filling and candies.
    Objective: Describe a variety of fillings and finishing techniques for candies.
    Objective: Define a variety of fillings and finishing techniques for candies.

    2120.6: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to temper chocolate.
    Objective: Discuss the chocolate tempering techniques.
    Objective: Describe the chocolate tempering techniques.
    Objective: Temper chocolate using the different techniques.
    Objective: Define and evaluate each tempering technique.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Syllabus and Course Overview
    2. Chocolate Technology, techniques. Bean to bar chocolate making
    3. Chocolate Decorations, Ribbons, Curls, Transfers
    4. Chocolate Decorations, Ribbons, Curls, Transfers
    5. Chocolate molding and spraying
    6. Chocolate molding and spraying
    7. Chocolate flowers
    8. Chocolate Centerpieces
    9. Chocolate Centerpieces
    10. Chocolate Centerpieces
    11. Chocolate Centerpieces
    12. Chocolate candies. Crystalline creations
    13. Hand formed chocolate candies
    14. Molded chocolate candies
    15. Cordials candies
    16. Clean up and Final Exam.

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2125 - Advanced Wine

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 2025  with grade C or better

    (formerly CULH 2913)

    This course is designed to give the students an in depth study of the world wine regions, vineyard management, wine making techniques and varietal characteristics. Topics will include beer, spirits and sake as well. Special emphasis will be placed on sensory perception of wine and deductive tasting techniques. Upon completion of the course, students will be prepared to register and sit for the Introductory Sommelier exam.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will complete a comprehensive course dedicated to the wines of the world and specifications of the Introductory Level Certification from the Court of Master Sommeliers

    Objectives:

    1. To prepare students to register, participate and pass the Introductory Level Sommelier exam

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop and enhance their sensory perceptions of wine and food.

    Objectives:

    1. To distinguish variances of flavor, body and aroma.
    2. To identify beverages that will enhance the flavor and aroma of food.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will identify geographical designations and corresponding terroir for wine regions throughout the world.

    Objectives:

    1. To define geographical wine growing regions
    2. To recognize and identify the impact of macro and micro-climatic influence within vineyards

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate proper wine service skills adherent to the standards of the Court of Master Sommeliers.

    Objectives:

    1. To identify customer needs and suggestively sell beverages to enhance their dining experience.
    2. To properly open and serve various types of wine, including still, sparkling and fortified.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1 -Introduction Deductive Tasting and Food and Wine Pairing
    Evaluation of the Deductive Tasting Method broken down into Sight, Nose, Palate and Conclusion (Initial and Final). Sight evaluation focusing on brightness, color, rim variation, sediment, tartrates, and viscosity. Nose evaluation focusing on flaw factors, intensity, age, and FEW (fruit, earth, wood). Palate evaluation focusing on sugar, body, alcohol, acidity, finish, and complexity. Structure of wine with food focusing on body, alcohol, acidity, residual sugar, flavors, and textures,

    Week 2-Viticulture and Winemaking
    Wine in the vineyard and the winery. Viticultural emphasis on climate, site selection, grape varieties, vineyard management, vineyard problems and harvest. Vinification focus on crushing/destemming, fermentation, maturation, bottling and packaging. Wine faults analysis.

    Week 3-AOC/AOP French Paradigm
    European Union wine laws and French wine classifications. An examination of hierarchy, varietal and appellations of Burgundy, Champagne and Sparkling Wine, Bordeaux, the Rhone Valley, Languedoc- Roussillon, Loire Valley, and Alsace.

    Week 4 - Deductive Tasting
    A two part class deductive tasting. Method is broken into five distinctive categories. Eight wines are presented to the group blindly (four at each time). Class is divided into groups of five and each group is broken into five analysis categories of one wine. Deductive Tasting Method is practiced verbally amongst classmates. Evaluation of food and wine pairing

    Week 5-Southern Hemisphere and South Africa
    The 20th century surgence of winemaking in Australia and New Zealand. Australian GI categories within the states of New South Whales, Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia, Western Australia, Northern Territory and Queensland. New Zealand’s geographical isolation, innovative wine technology and evaluation of North and South Island regions. South Africa as a young/old winemaking industry, political history, and Wine of Origin system for the Coastal, Breede River Valley, Olifants River, Klein Karoo, and Boberg regions.

    Week 6-Deductive Tasting
    Deductive Tasting Method practiced with class broken into groups. Evaluation of 8 wines verbally. Food and wine pairing

    Week 7-United States AVA’s
    Wine laws, controlling alcohol taxation, and the geographical boundaries within the United States. Examination of history, American Viticultural Areas, and Label Laws for California, Oregon, Washington, New York, Michigan and other states. Wine service and salesmanship.

    Week 8-Deductive Tasting/Food and Wine Pairing

    Week 9-DOCG Italy Wine Law
    Diversity of geology, topography, grape varietals, appellations and wine styles within the 20 regions of Italy. Evaluation of Northern, Central, Southern Italy and the Islands. Defining DOCG’s, geographical boundaries and varietals.

    Week 10-Deductive Tasting/Food and Wine Pairing

    Week 11-Northern Europe and Mediterranean
    The small wine estates of Germany, history and QmP classifications highlighting Riesling and Spatburgunder. Austrian Qualitatswein classifications and a history of scandal. Germany versus Austria governmental ripeness classifications. The foreign and domestic investment of Hungary, its history and varietals. The unique soil types, micro climates and varietals of Greece.

    Week 12-Deductive Tasting/Food and Wine Pairing

    Week 13- DO Spain Wine Law and Fortification
    Evaluation of varietals, classifications and aging of Spanish wines. Defining Northwest, North Central, Northeast and Southern Spain. Specifications off Sherry production and classification. DOC Portugal Wine Law, focus on non-fortified wines, indigenous grape varieties, grape growing and winemaking practices. The styles and production methods of Port wine and the complexity of Madeira.

    Week 14-Deductive Tasting/Food and Wine Pairing

    Week 15-South America and Other Beverages
    The value conscious to ultra-premium wines of Chile and the Ministry of Agricultures wine legislation. Argentinean production, background, varietals, and regions. Ingredients and styles of Beer, production and categories of Spirits, and Sake production and styles.

    Week 16-Final Exam
    Comprehensive Written Final Exam, Practical Service Exam and Individual Blind Wine Tasting.


    Primary Faculty
    Pusta, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2160 - Plated Desserts

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 2180 

    CULH 2160 gives students an overall appreciation and understanding of plated desserts and the techniques used to create high quality, visually attractive desserts for restaurants, country clubs, and conference centers.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    COURSE OUTCOMES:

    2160.1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to demonstrate the scaling techniques used in baking.
    Objective: Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    Objective: Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    2160.2: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate the use of dessert sauces in a plated dessert creation.
    Objective: Define the steps in the preparation of dessert sauces.
    Objective: Explain the process used in the preparation of dessert sauces.
    Objective: Prepare a dessert creations using dessert sauces.

    2160.3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate dessert plating techniques.
    Objective: Explain the plating process as it applies to desserts.
    Objective: Define the steps in the plating of desserts.
    Objective: Describe the steps in the plating of desserts.
    Objective: Prepare a variety of plated desserts.

    2160.4: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to produce a completed plated dessert by using a variety of fillings and toppings.
    Objective: Discuss method of preparation and finishing techniques for various fillings and toppings.
    Objective: Define a variety of fillings and toppings for various dessert creations.
    Objective: Describe a variety of fillings and toppings for various dessert creations.

    2160.5: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate frozen desserts.
    Objective: Prepare frozen desserts.
    Objective: Describe a variety of ice creams, sorbets and frozen desserts.
    Objective: Define a variety of ice creams, sorbets and frozen desserts.

    2160.6: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to prepare a plated dessert from a ” Mystery basket”
    Objective: Define and outline a dessert using the mystery basket ingredients.
    Objective: Describe a dessert made using the mystery basket ingredient.
    Objective: Prepare and evaluate a dessert using the mystery basket ingredients in the time allotted.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week

    1. Review syllabus/Sanitation/Ingredients
    2. Techniques for plate presentation
    3. Techniques for plate presentation
    4. Garnishes/Sauces/Test #1
    5. Fresh fruit desserts
    6. Fresh fruit desserts
    7. Desserts with autumn and tropical fruits
    8. Desserts with autumn and tropical fruits/Mid term exam
    9. Desserts made with winter fruits, dried fruits, nuts
    10. Deserts made with winter fruits, dried fruits, nuts
    11. Desserts made with chocolate, coffee
    12. Desserts made with chocolate, coffee/Test #3
    13. Modernistic desserts
    14. Modernistic desserts
    15. Student final project
    16. Clean up/Final exam

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2180 - Pastry Arts

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155  and CULH 1340  with grade C or better and a ServSafe certificate

    (formerly CULH 2020)

    CULH 2180 gives students an overall appreciation and understanding of fine pastries. Students learn to effectively produce a variety of specialty doughs, pastries, and desserts such as flans, tarts, individual and miniature pastries, souffles, chocolates, plated desserts, ice cream and sugar work, tortes and mousse tortes.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to demonstrate the scaling techniques used in baking.

    Objectives: Upon compltion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    2. Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to accurately use the different ingredients in baking.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify ingredients used in baking.
    2. List function of various ingredients used in baking.
    3. Describe the properties of various ingredients used in baking.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to prepare fillings and toppings for pastry creations.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss methods of preparation and finishing techniques for various fillings and toppings.
    2. Define a variety of fillings and toppings for various dessert creations.
    3. Describe a variety of fillings and toppings for various dessert creations.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate the quality of different “egg foam” cakes.

    Objectives:

    1. Prepare “egg foam” cakes.
    2. Discuss the different ” egg foam” cakes mixing methods.
    3. Define and describe the steps and mixing methods used for “egg foam” cakes.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate tortes and entremets.

    1. Prepare tortes and entremets.
    2. Define the procedure and steps used for creating tortes and entremets.
    3. Explain the process for creating totes and entremets.
    4. Describe the procedure and steps used to create tortes and entremets.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate ice creams and sorbets.

    1. Prepare ice creams and sorbets.
    2. Define the different types of ice creams and sorbets mixing methods.
    3. Describe a variety of ice creams and sorbets mixing methods.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Review syllabus/Course overview/Equipment/Sanitation
    2. Short doughs, tarts, and flans/Read Chapter 11
    3. Classic buttercream tortes/Read Chapters 13 and 17
    4. Mousse tortes/Read Chapter 17/ Test #1
    5. Modern mousse tortes
    6. Bavarian & charlottes /Read chapter 17
    7. Miniature pastries/Meringues/Read Chapter 18
    8. Individual pastries/ Read chapter 12/ midterm exam
    9. Chocolate work and candies/Read Chapter 20
    10. Sugar work/ Read chapter 20
    11. Plated desserts/ Restaurant desserts/ read chapter 19
    12. Souffles, custards, meringues/ Read chapter 14/Test #3
    13. Healthfull & special need desserts/ read chapter 16
    14. Ice cream and sorbets/ Read chapter 15
    15. Practical exam group 1
    16. Practical exam group 2/Final exam all class.

    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • CULH 2200 - Artisan & Special Breads

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: CULH 1155  and CULH 1340  with grade C or better and a ServSafe certificate

    (formerly CULH 2060)

    CULH 2200 gives students advanced training in producing breads, learning the artisan bread making techniques from the old world and from around the world, and producing effectively a variety of breads, decorated loaves, and bread centerpieces for parties, buffets, etc.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    COURSE OUTCOME:

    2200.1: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to demonstrate the scaling techniques used in baking.
    Objective: Identify different scales and scaling procedures.
    Objective: Describe steps used in properly scaling ingredients.

    2200.2: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to accurately use the different ingredients in baking.
    Objective: Identify ingredients used in baking.
    Objective: List function of various ingredients used in baking.
    Objective: Describe the properties of various ingredients used in baking.

    2200.3: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate the quality of Artisan and yeast leavened breads.
    Objective: Prepare artisan style and yeast leavened breads.
    Objective: Define the steps in the production of artisan and yeast leavened breads.
    Objective: Describe the steps in the production of artisan and yeast leavened breads.

    2200.4: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to evaluate the quality of laminated dough products.
    Objective: Prepare laminated dough products.
    Objective: Define the variety of laminated doughs.
    Objective: Explain the process of lamination as it applies to doughs. Objective: Describe the variety of laminated doughs.

    2200.5: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to prepare fillings and toppings for breakfast pastries and breads.
    Objective: Discuss methods of preparation and finishing techniques for various fillings and toppings.
    Objective: Define a variety of fillings and toppings for pastries and baked goods.
    Objective: Describe a variety of fillings and toppings for pastries and baked goods.

    2200.6: Upon completion of this class, a student will be able to construct a centerpiece composed of bread products.
    Objective: List different components of bread centerpiece.
    Objective: Describe the different components of bread centerpiece.
    Objective: Execute bread centerpiece in time allotted.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Course overview/Syllabus/Sanitation/Ingredients
    2. French breads
    3. French breads
    4. British breads/Test #1
    5. Scandinavian and northern European breads
    6. Scandinavian and northern European breads
    7. Mediterranean breads
    8. Breads of the Americas
    9. Indian, Middle eastern and Far-East breads/Mid term exam
    10. Advanced breakfast breads
    11. Advanced breakfast breads and Artistic breads
    12. Artistic breads
    13. Buffet display breads/Test #3
    14. Artistic centerpieces
    15. Artistic centerpieces
    16. Final exam/clean up

    This course outline is only a guide of what will be produced in class. Due to resting time during bread production; other projects also will be worked on during class.


    Primary Faculty
    O’Farrell, Scott
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick
    Dean
    Balsamo, Michael



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Drafting & Design

  
  • ATDD 1620 - Drafting-Structural Drawing

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1960  

    Acquaintance with types of stress. The use of the Steel Construction Manual charts in the selection and drawing of framed beams, seated beams, stiffened and unstiffened beam seats, columns, right and left hand parts. Fastening methods such as rivets, bolts, and welds. The application of welding symbols and determining the strength of fillet welds.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to determine dimensions of structural steel shapes by use of the Manual of Steel Construction.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a steel manual and final exam questions, the student will identify five structural steel shapes.
    2. Given a steel manual and final exam questions, the student will identify five structural steel sizes.
    3. Given a steel manual and final exam questions, the student will identify five structural steel weights.

                                                     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate simple stresses for given loads and cross-sectional areas and manipulate the basic formula for S, P, and A.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a force and formula, the student will determine the stress produced on five structural shapes.
    2. Given a formula and five structural shapes, the student will determine the cross-sectional area of each shape.
    3. Given a formula and the allowable stress, the student will determine the maximum force to be applied to each of five structural shapes.

                                                     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate simple stress given loads and cross-section areas and manipulate some formulas.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a formula and the allowable deflection, the student will determine the maximum force to be applied to each of five structural shapes.

                                                     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate deflection of beams and to correctly apply safety factors.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a force and formula, the student will determine the deflection produced on five structural shapes.
    2. Given a formula, a force, and the allowable deflection, the student will determine the correct safety factor to be applied to each of five structural shapes.

                                                     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use and interpret welding symbols.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the welding symbol that describes a butt weld.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the welding symbol that describes a fillet weld.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the welding symbol that describes an all-around weld.
    4. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the weld size and length on a welding symbol.
    5. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the weld strength on a welding symbol.

                                     

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to detail framed and seated beams.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given an incomplete structural drawing, the student will add the missing components.
    2. Given an incomplete structural drawing, the student will determine if right hand or left hand parts are needed.

                                                     

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret column details and methods of beam connections.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a description of an overhead crane, tables, and formulas, the student will determine the structural components required.
    2. Given a description of an overhead crane, tables, and formulas, the student will determine the type of fasteners required.
    3. Given a description of an overhead crane, tables, and formulas, the student will determine the size of fasteners required.

                                                   

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate deflection of beams and to correctly apply safety factors.

    Objectives:                        

    1. Given a force and formula, the student will determine the deflection produced on five structural shapes.
    2. Given a formula and the allowable deflection, the student will determine the maximum force to be applied to each of five structural shapes.
    3. Given a formula, a force, and the allowable deflection, the student will determine the correct safety factor to be applied to each of five structural shapes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre-test, manual of steel construction stock list information
    2. Manual of steel construction stock list information (continued)
    3. Detailing and fabricating operation worksheet
    4. Simple stresses worksheet
    5. Deformation, deflection, and safety factors worksheet
    6. Bolted and riveted connections worksheet
    7. Welded connections and welding symbols worksheet
    8. Bending moment and section modules worksheet
    9. Details of framed beams, bolted or riveted connections
    10. Detailing of seated beams bolted or riveted connections detail drawing
    11. Detailing of right and left handed parts
    12. Detailing of framed beams and welded connections
    13. Column details
    14. Typical floor beam detailing
    15. Typical floor beam detailing (continued)
    16. Final examination

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1630 - Drafting-Conveyors

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1960  

    Blueprint reading and simplified drawing of conveyors, chain, slat, piano hinged, rubber belt, roller, monorail, over and under, power and free.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and properly apply the use of slat conveyors.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print, the student will identify all the moving components.
    2. Given a print, the student will determine the speed of the conveyors.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the material carried by the conveyor.

                                                     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and properly apply the use of belt conveyors.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print, the student will identify all the moving components.
    2. Given a print, the student will determine the speed of the conveyors.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the material carried by the conveyor.

                                                     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and properly apply the use of monorail conveyors, both overhead and floor mounted.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print, the student will locate the floor mounted monorail conveyor and determine its flow.
    2. Given a print, the student will locate the overhead monorail conveyor and determine its flow.
    3. Given a print, the student will identify all the moving components.
    4. Given a print, the student will determine the speed of the conveyors.
    5. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the material carried by the conveyor.

                                                     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to properly apply the techniques of conveyor layout for all types of systems.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given an industrial floor plan, the student will lay out a floor mounted monorail conveyor system.
    2. Given an industrial floor plan, the student will lay out an overhead monorail conveyor system.

                                                     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and apply the needs for power and type conveyor systems.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify three reasons why companies use power and free conveyor systems.
    2. Given a conveyor layout and final exam questions, the student will identify which part of the system is power and which is free.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre-test, chain conveyors
    2. Slat conveyors
    3. Metal belt conveyor (piano hinged)
    4. Belt conveyors - beds, idlers, belting
    5. Flat rubber belt conveyors
    6. Portable inclined conveyor
    7. Monorail conveyors - trolleys, chains, hangers, curves, take-ups, drives
    8. Ceiling supported monorail conveyor
    9. Floor supported monorail conveyor
    10. Development of a layout for a monorail conveyor
    11. Power and free conveyors - power line, free line, trolleys, suspension, switches, drives
    12. Power and free conveyor layout
    13. Conveyor system - bucket and belt units
    14. Conveyor review
    15. Conveyor review (continued)
    16. Final exam

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1640 - Drafting-Plant Layout & Equipment

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1960  

    Blueprint reading and simplified drawings for the fabrication and installation of hoists, catwalks, platforms, machinery foundations, exhaust systems, heat treat furnaces, helical and continuous washers. Practice in making simple plant layouts.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret structural steel drawings.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the location and components of a hoist.
    2. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the location and components of a catwalk.
    3. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the location and components of a platform.
    4. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the location and components of a stationary ladder.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify heat treatment processes in the plant.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify where the carburizing process occurs in the plant.
    2. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify where the quenching process occurs in the plant.
    3. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify where the tempering process occurs in the plant.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret exhaust systems, drum and monorail washer blueprint drawings.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print of a drum washer system, the student will locate the components of the exhaust system and determine it direction of flow.
    2. Given a print of a monorail washer system, the student will locate the components of the exhaust system and determine it direction of flow.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify exhaust systems and cleaning operations.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the components of a tank immersion system and describe the operation.
    2. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the components of a steam cleaning system and describe the operation.
    3. Given a print and final exam questions, the student will identify the components of a vapor degreasing system and describe the operation.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to construct simple plant layouts of machinery and equipment.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given a floor plan and equipment cut-outs, the student will develop an operating layout of industrial washers.
    2. Given a floor plan and equipment cut-outs, the student will develop an operating layout of industrial conveyors.
    3. Given a floor plan and equipment cut-outs, the student will develop an operating layout of milling machines.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to construct simple plant and machine foundation layouts.

    Objectives:                         

    1. Given an equipment layout for milling machines, the student will determine the location of the machine foundation.
    2. Given an equipment layout for milling machines, the student will calculate the thickness of the machine foundation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre-test, blueprint reading of structural steel for a hoist
    2. Carburizing furnaces
    3. Exhaust systems
    4. Catwalks, platforms, and crossover stairways
    5. Drum washer
    6. Monorail washer
    7. Layout and installation of machinery and equipment
    8. Plant, machine, and foundation layouts
    9. Plant layout - project a - interpretation of existing layout accompanying process sheets
    10. Project a (continued)
    11. Plant layout - project b - interpretation of existing layout and accompanying process sheets
    12. Project b (continued)
    13. Plant layout - project c - interpretation of accompanying process sheets
    14. Project c (continued)
    15. Review
    16. Final examination

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1900 - Drafting-Machine Tool Blueprint Reading

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course is an introduction to blueprint reading. The focus is on the interpretation of the fundamental components of a working blueprint, including their various symbology and industrial specifications, as well as different types of working blueprints. The industrial structures and mechanical systems found on working blueprints are also major components of this course.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the fundamental components of a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Identify the orthographic and isometric views found on a blueprint.
    2. Identify the types of section views and auxiliary views found on a blueprint.
    3. Explain the types of lines found on a blueprint.
    4. Explain the types of units of measure and dimensions found on a blueprint.
    5. Describe the title block and revision column found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the various symbology and industrial specifications found on a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Explain the types of tolerances found on a blueprint.
    2. Explain the types of symbols found on a blueprint.
    3. Explain the types of surface finishes and steel specifications found on a blueprint.
    4. Identify the basic geometric dimensioning and tolerancing language found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the various types of industrial structures and mechanical systems found on a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe the types of industrial castings and structural steel shapes found on a blueprint.
    2. Describe the types of weldments found on a blueprint.
    3. Identify the types of fastening systems found on a blueprint.
    4. Identify the types of assembly systems found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret different types of working blueprints.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe a detail drawing.
    2. Describe an assembly drawing
    3. Describe a bill of materials.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Orthographic and isometric views
    2. Section views and auxiliary views
    3. Line types
    4. Units of measure and dimensions
    5. Title block and revision column
    6. Tolerances
    7. Symbols
    8. Surface finishes and steel specifications
    9. Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing
    10. Industrial castings and structural steel shapes
    11. Weldments
    12. Fastening systems
    13. Assembly systems
    14. Detail drawings
    15. Assembly drawings
    16. Bills of materials

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1910 - Fundamentals of Descriptive Geometry

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ATDD 2911)

    This course uses practical application to solve engineering problems through the projection of three-dimensional figures onto a two-dimensional plane surface. Students will utilize orthographic techniques to yield solutions such as the true length of a line, end/point view of a line, true shape of a plane, and edge view of a plane.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to project points and lines in the principle views using orthographic projection.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Develop reference planes.
    2. Project points, straight lines and curved lines in all principle views.
    3. Create intersecting and non-intersecting lines in all principle views.
    4. Construct points and lines in and on the plane in all principle views.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to develop necessary auxiliary views using orthographic projection.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Construct true length of an oblique line.
    2. Develop true view of an inclined plane.
    3. Construct true view and end view of an oblique line.
    4. Determine true view and true angles between planes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to develop necessary orthographic views using rules of parallelism and perpendicularity to yield proper measurements.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Construct line parallel to a line.
    2. Construct plane parallel to plane.
    3. Construct and measure perpendicular lines.
    4. Determine shortest distance between point and a line.
    5. Determine visibility of lines and planes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Basics of orthographic projection, descriptive geometry defined, reference planes, points
    2. Lines, True Length, Curved lines
    3. Intersecting & Non-intersecting lines
    4. Planes, True View, Inclined, Oblique
    5. Line In/On a Plane & Points In/On a Plane
    6. True Length of Oblique line/True View of an Inclined Plane
    7. Edge View of Inclined/Oblique plane
    8. Midterm
    9. Parallelism: Line Parallel to a Line/Plane, Plane Parallel to a Plane
    10. Perpendicularity: Construction, Line Perpendicular to a Plane, Shortest distance from Point to Plane
    11. Plane Perpendicular to a line, plane perpendicular to a plane
    12. Visibility
    13. True angle between oblique lines, end view of a line
    14. Distance between point & a line, two lines
    15. Angle between oblique planes/Line & a Plane
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1920 - Drafting-Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1900  or ATDD 1950   

    The content for this course is based on the latest ANSI/ASME Y14.5 Dimensioning and Tolerancing Standard. An introduction to tolerancing, symbology, form controls, datum referencing, orientation controls, position controls, runout and profile controls, location of fixed and floating fasteners, position of coaxial features and position on non-cylindrical features.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering drawing symbols, dimensioning requirements, dimensioning applications and limits of size.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply symbols to dimensioning requirements to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply dimensioning applications and limits of size to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Form Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering drawing Form Tolerancing, Datum’s, Orientation Tolerancing and Location Tolerancing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Datum’s and Datum referencing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Orientation Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Position Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Symmetry Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    5. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Concentricity Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering Runout Tolerancing, Profile Tolerancing, practical applications and dimensional calculation methods.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Runout Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Profile Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply dimensional measurement calculations to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction and Orientation to the Course Introduction to Dimensioning and Tolerancing
    2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing Symbols
    3. Dimensioning Requirements
    4. Dimensioning Applications and Limits of Size
    5. Form Tolerancing
    6. Datums and Datum References
    7. Orientation Tolerancing
    8. Position Tolerancing - Fundamentals
    9. Position Tolerancing - Expanded Principles, Symmetry and Text and Study Guide Review Questions
    10. Concentricity
    11. Runout Tolerancing
    12. Profile Tolerancing
    13. Tolerancing-Applications and Calculations Methods

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1950 - Drafting-Essentials

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Introduction to blueprint reading and drafting: class exercises in interpreting lines, view positions, conventions, and standards found on prints; use of drawing tools, simple geometric construction, fundamentals of orthographic projection, use of finish symbols, the application of scale and precision dimensioning and an introduction to metric dimensioning.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the communication tools used in orthographic mechanical drafting.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on definitions and terms, define and apply the terms to orthographic mechanical drafting with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on communication tools, apply correct lettering and alphabet of lines to communicate on orthographic mechanical drafting with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on size description, dimension orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to provide shape description.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on shape description, draw free hand sketching of orthographic geometric objects with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on shape description, draw shapes of normal, slant, receding and inclined surfaces on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on shape description, draw shapes of cylinders and complex shapes on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to provide size description.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description to normal surfaces with English and Metric units on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description to incline, slant, receding and oblique surfaces with English and Metric units on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description with precision dimensions, classes of fits and allowances on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. The Industrial Language and Lettering
    2. Geometric Constructions
    3. Applications of Geometric Construction
    4. Shape Description (freehand sketching)
    5. Shape Description (normal surfaces)
    6. Shape Description (slant and oblique surfaces)
    7. Cylinders and Complex Shapes
    8. Size Description
    9. Dimensioning of Cylindrical Objects
    10. Shape & Size Description
    11. Dimensioning of Precision Measurements
    12. Metric System (SI) Units
    13. Fits and Allowances
    14. Blueprint Reading Worksheet

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1960 - Drafting-Conventions & Symbols

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1950 

    Drawings to illustrate assembly and detail drawings, print identification, holes, sections, tapers, and casting. Practice in reading related shop prints, and metric dimensioning.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe engineering drawing working instructions for assembly drawings, detail drawings, and casting drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering assembly drawings, read and interpret working instructions for assembly drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on engineering detail drawings, read and interpret working instructions for detail drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on engineering casting drawings, read and interpret working instructions for casting drawings with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on engineering drawing, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection the following with 80% accuracy:
      1. Drilled holes
      2. Counterbored holes
      3. Countersunk holes
      4. Reamed holes
      5. Bored holes
      6. Tapped holes
      7. Doweled holes
      8. Tapers
      9. Chamfers
      10. Relief’s and undercuts

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe engineering drawing sectioning including, full sections, half sections, revolved sections, aligned sections, offset sections, removed sections, broken out sections, and partial sections.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of full and half sections with 80% accuracy
    2. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of revolved sections, aligned sections and offset sections with 80% accuracy
    3. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of removed sections, broken out sections and partial sections with 80% accuracy

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the process of reading and interpreting engineering drawings of assemblies, details and castings for manufacturing and assembly of components.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering assembly drawings, read and interpret assembly drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy
    2. Using the material presented on engineering detail drawings, read and interpret detail drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy
    3. Using the material presented on engineering casting drawings, read and interpret casting drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Working instructions
    2. Assembly drawings
    3. Drawings and dimensioning of holes
    4. Drawing and dimensions of tapped holes
    5. Manufacturing engineering prints with castings & surface intersection
    6. Casting drawings
    7. Full and half sections
    8. Revolving out of position and aligned sections
    9. Offset sections and sections through ribs
    10. Revolved and removed sections
    11. Broken-out enlarged and partial sections
    12. Print reading problems
    13. Tapers, chamfer, and relief or undercut
    14. Product engineering blueprints

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1970 - Drafting-Three Dimensional Shape Interpretation

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATDD 1950 

    Pictorial drawing concentrating on the isometric and oblique methods. Practice in three-dimensional visualization interpretation of orthographic prints is stressed by modeling clay into forms related to prints that cover the fundamentals of shape interpretation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of normal surfaces, inclined surfaces and oblique surfaces in three-dimensional oblique pictorial drawing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on normal surfaces, draw normal surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on inclined surfaces, draw inclined surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on oblique surfaces, draw oblique surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of normal surfaces, inclined surfaces and oblique surfaces in three-dimensional isometric pictorial drawing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on normal surfaces, draw normal surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on inclined surfaces, draw inclined surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on oblique surfaces, draw oblique surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of oblique and isometric curved surfaces, dimensioning of oblique and isometric drawings and sectioning of oblique and isometric drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on curved surfaces, draw oblique and isometric curved surfaces with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on dimensioning, dimension oblique and isometric drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on sectioning, section oblique and isometric drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial solid modeling with clay or cardboard of normal, inclined and oblique surfaces on solid three-dimensional models.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model normal surfaces on solid three dimensional models with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model inclined surfaces on solid three-dimensional models with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model oblique surfaces on solid three dimensional models with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Pictorial Drawing
    2. Inclined Edges and Surfaces in Oblique Drawings
    3. Circles and Cylinders in Oblique Drawings
    4. Isometric Drawings
    5. Isometric Circles and Curves
    6. Dimensioning and Notes in Pictorial Drawings
    7. Sections in Pictorial
    8. Pictorial Final

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Drafting & Computer Graphics

  
  • DRCG 1140 - Interactive Computer Graphics-Introduction to 2D & 3D AutoCAD

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (replaces DRCG 1100)

    This course is designed as an introduction to computer graphics using a PC-based system with AutoCAD software. This course covers computer graphic components, terms, and commands associated with AutoCAD software. This course covers basic file management, two-dimensional, and three-dimensional drawings.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will to identify, define, and use the various components of a computer graphics workstation.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of a graphic workstation.
    2. Recognize the function of the keyboard and how it pertains to AutoCAD.
    3. Demonstrate the use of the mouse key and how they pertain to AutoCAD.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will identify, create, and use proper file management to save all work.

    Objectives:

    1. Create file folders on a specific drive.
    2. Import drawing files.
    3. Demonstrate the use of save and save as and how they pertain to AutoCAD.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use and define the terms, commands, command option selections, and command overrides associated with AutoCAD software.

    Objectives:

    1. Define selected commands and how the pertain to AutoCAD.
    2. Recognize the options for each selected command.
    3. Recognize the overrides for each selected command.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will edit existing drawings and geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Modify existing drawings using selected commands.
    2. Create geometry as selected.
    3. Arrange the different drawings and geometry on the limits as directed.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will draw, modify, and view various 3D drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Create 3D drawings from 2D drawing using selected commands.
    2. Create 3D geometry from solids.
    3. View 3D drawings using selected commands.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will draw and annotate architectural, graphical, and technical 2D and 3D drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Create architectural drawings using selected commands.
    2. Create technical drawings using selected commands.
    3. Prepare a 3D drawing from a selected drawing using selected commands.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will setup and plot drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup specified plotter.
    2. Prepare drawing scale.
    3. Select correct sheet size for plotting.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Workstation, Login, Logout, and Screen Areas
    2. Input Devices, Draw and Display Commands, and Options
    3. Modify Commands and Input Devices
    4. Modify and Display Commands
    5. Draw Commands and Osnap Overrides
    6. Adding Text and Dimensions Setup
    7. Blocks, Print Drawing and New Drawing Files
    8. Plotting Drawings
    9. 3D Introduction, Viewing 3D Drawings, and User Coordinate System Icon
    10. Creating 3D Drawings from 2D
    11. Creating 3D Solid Models
    12. Modifying 3D Models5
    13. Creating 2D Drawing from 3D Models

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Early Childhood Studies

  
  • ECHS 1100 - Early Childhood Development

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course provides an introduction to the growth, development and learning processes of the young child to age eight. Major developmental theories are integrated with all domains including; physical, social, emotional, language and cognitive. This course covers the influence of the environment on the developing child and the adult’s role in using assessment to support development. Students will learn how assessment is used to determine goals and teaching strategies for young children.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the historical contributions of the major theorists in early childhood as they relate to child development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major developmental theories.
    2. Research an assigned theorist and present findings to the class.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to summarize how young children’s characteristics and needs influence the child’s future development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the physical, social, emotional, language, and cognitive development of children from conception to age eight.
    2. Identify biological and environmental factors that influence development.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will recognize that positive relationships and supportive interactions are the foundation of their work with young children.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe implications of cultural, linguistic, environmental and family influences on development and learning.
    2. Examine ways to foster family collaboration and involvement.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to assess development through the use of observation.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe how assessment leads to the development of appropriate goals, curriculum and teaching strategies.
    2. Compare various assessment methods.
    3. Describe the value of observation.
    4. Delineate the difference between objective and subjective recording techniques.
    5. Identify professional and ethical considerations to observing.
    6. Collect data.
    7. Interpret data to create a plan to support further development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1, 2 Theories in Early Childhood Development
    3 Objective Assessment
    4 Conception, Pregnancy, Birth, biological and environmental factors affecting infants and the new family
    5, 6 Infancy, development, guidance, social and cultural effects
    7, 8, 9 Ages one to three, development, guidance, social and cultural considerations
    10, 11 Ages four and five, development, guidance, social and cultural considerations
    12, 13, 14 Ages six to eight, development, guidance, social and cultural considerations
    15, 16 The assessment process and its relationship to supporting development

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Alward, Brenda
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1150 - Infant-Toddler Development & Curriculum

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210 ; and ECHS 1100  all with grade C or better

    (formerly ECHS 1540)

    This course focuses on the growth and development of infants and toddlers as it relates to planning authentic learning opportunities and developmentally appropriate environments. Theories of development (social, emotional, cognitive, physical, and language) provide the foundation of knowledge necessary to support young children through observation, assessment and curriculum planning. Because children are viewed in the context of family, culture, and community, and cognition is directly influenced by social connections, students will learn appropriate caregiving strategies and how to support and empower families through respectful and reciprocal relationships. Students will complete 30 hours of observation with infants and toddlers.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to summarize stages of development and learning from infancy through toddlerhood, and implement activities that aid growth in each area.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will observe a child to develop a child case study with specific learning objectives to promote skills and growth across all developmental domains.
      1. Identify strategies to support Physical Development.
      2. Identify strategies to support Language Development.
      3. Identify strategies to support Social Development.
      4. Identify strategies to support Emotional Development.
      5. Identify strategies to support Cognitive Development.

    Outcome 2:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to evaluate daily schedules and routines for infant and toddler classrooms.

    Objectives:

    1. State important considerations for schedules and routines for infants and toddlers.
    2. Critique sample schedules.
    3. Create a daily schedule for infants and toddlers based on their individual needs.

    Outcome 3:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to evaluate infant and toddler environments.

    Objectives:

    1. Design a safe developmentally appropriate learning environment for infants and toddlers.
      1. Plan the environment.
      2. Interpret the role of aesthetics in environments for young children.
      3. Select furnishings, toys, materials, and equipment necessary for infants and toddlers.
      4. Provide provisions for adult space.
      5. Organize materials.
      6. List safety concerns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify appropriate child guidance techniques for very young children.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the social/emotional development of very young children as it relates to guidance.
    2. Describe the adult’s role in creating an emotionally safe environment.
    3. Identify influences on behavior.
    4. Describe developmentally appropriate approaches to child guidance.
    5. List proactive strategies to promote behavioral growth.
    6. State how families and early educators can work together to support the child.  
       

    Outcome 5:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to observe, record, assess and document behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify learning outcomes for infants and toddlers.
    2. Describe the value of observation
    3. Clarify the difference between objective and subjective recording techniques.
    4. Observe infants and toddlers and record observations with anecdotal notes.
    5. Interpret data collected.
      1. Recognize the dimensions of the individual child.
      2. View children in the context of family, culture, and community.
      3. Recognize that life circumstances and past experiences can contribute to or stifle development. 
    6. Show how observations can be used for planning activities that target learning outcomes.
    7. Notate how observations can be used for changes in the environment.
    8. Describe how observations can be shared with colleagues and families.

    Outcome 6:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify factors that influence a child’s growth and development.

    Objectives:

    1. Research both biological and environmental factors that positively and negatively affect growth and development.
    2. Notate which factors are protective factors and which are risk factors.
    3. Recognize that relationships affect virtually all aspects of development.
    4. Identify ways to support and respect the diverse values and beliefs of families and caregivers.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1: Course Introduction

    Week 2: Introduction to Curriculum for Infants and Toddlers

    Week 3: Physical Development, Stages of Development

    Week 4: Language Development - Physical and Cognitive

    Week 5:  Language Development - Expressive and Receptive

    Week 6:  Emotional Development -Relationships, Protective and Risk Factors

    Week 7: Social Emotional Development - Temperament Theory

    Week 8: Social Emotional Development - Developmental Theories

    Week 9: Child Development Theory, Child Guidance Techniques for Infants and Toddlers

    Week 10:  Curriculum- Routines, Schedules And Environments

    Week 11: Cognitive Development, Stages of Development

    Week 12:  Developmentally Appropriate Practice, Theorist Research

    Week 13:  Curriculum - Observing, Recording, Assessing, Documenting, Child Case Study

    Week 14:  Curriculum - NAEYC’s Code of Ethics, Writing Activity Plans, Child Case Study

    Week 15:  Curriculum - Family, Culture and Community, Child Case Study

    Week 16: Curriculum - Cultural Practices in Child Rearing


    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1200 - Early Childhood Curriculums

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1100  with grade C or better

    This course will explore curriculum models, program types, and underlying theories utilized in designing early childhood curriculum. Students will learn the goals, benefits, and uses of assessment to evaluate environments, routines, activities, and child guidance techniques. Students will design, implement, and evaluate curriculum developmentally appropriate for children ages 2 ½ to 5. Students will complete 30 hours of observation in a preschool or child care center with preschool age children.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to state the contribution of historical educational leaders to early childhood education.

    Objectives:

    1. Define early childhood education.
    2. Compare a variety of early childhood programs.
    3. Identify social forces and trends in early childhood.
    4. Identify the pioneers in early childhood and be able to state their contributions.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the major principles of early childhood curriculum models.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the elements of active learning.
    2. State what children do in an active learning environment.
    3. Describe the teachers’ role in supporting active learning.
    4. Be familiar with Erikson’s building blocks of human relations.
    5. Compare a variety of learning environments.
    6. Describe strategies for supporting all families to encourage relationship building while respecting diversity in culture, language, and ethnicity.
    7. Describe characteristics of effective teacher-child relationships.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize the principles of Developmentally Appropriate Practice (DAP) when observing and assessing an early childhood environment and routine. 

    Objectives:

    1. Define Developmentally Appropriate Practice (DAP)
    2. Describe the general guidelines for organizing space and materials.
    3. Describe the architectural elements of the room.
    4. Describe room components that recognize diverse family and community characteristics.
    5. Define objective assessment.
    6. Observe, document, and assess a preschool classroom.
    7. Develop a personal philosophy of the early childhood environment and daily routine.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate curriculum based on content knowledge of academic and developmental disciplines.

    Objectives:

    1. Be familiar with learning outcomes for children 2 1/2 to 5 years old.
    2. State how the outcomes can be achieved throughout the learning environment.
    3. Design, implement and evaluate activities (Large Group and Small Group) that support learning outcomes.
    4. Describe how materials and activities can support the achievement of learning outcomes.

     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify guidance techniques that enable children to become problem solvers.

    Objectives:

    1. State how language and cognitive development influence social and emotional growth.
    2. List factors that determine a child’s social competence and what social expectations the early educator should have for the young child.
    3. Know the difference between general and specific praise.
    4. Describe the steps in problem-solving.
    5. Describe a variety of guidance techniques and state when they are most effective.
    6. Use an assessment tool to assess adult/child interactions in an early childhood classroom.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week Topic
    1, 2 Philosophy and Trends in ECH
    3, 4 Active Learning, Key Experiences, Suporting Families
    5 Developmentally Appropriate Practice and the Early Childhood Environment
    6, 7 The Daily Routine, Planning, Work and Recall
    8 Creative Representation
    9 Language
    10, 11 Social Competence
    12 Classification
    13 Numbers and Spatial Relations
    14 Time and Planning Special Events
    15 Selecting a Primary Curriculum Model

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1250 - Family, School, & Community

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1150  and ECHS 1200  all with grade C or better

    (formerly ECHS 1600)

    This course examines the interrelationships of family, school, and community in the life of the child and emphasizes the early educator’s role in nurturing school-family partnerships to support the family’s involvement in the child’s education. Diverse family and community characteristics, societal issues, effective communication, relationship building and community resources are also explored.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify social issues and their effects on children and families.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the impact of society on today’s families.
      1. Reference theories of Urie Bronfenbrenner and Abraham Maslow.
    2. Describe the potential causes of child abuse and neglect.
    3. Define what it means to be a mandated reporter and the early educator’s responsibility to report.
    4. Develop strategies for managing stressful interactions.
    5. Define advocacy.

    Outcome 2:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply strength-based practices when supporting culturally or structurally diverse families.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the combination of factors that determine how a child develops.
      1. Characteristics of the child; physical, cognitive, social-emotional
      2. Culture; family, home, community
      3. Individual experiences
    2. Describe an inclusive environment that welcomes culturally and structurally diverse families.
      1. Discuss how classroom materials reflect the characteristics, values, and practices of diverse cultural groups.
    3. Recognize the influence of social biases and stereotypes.
    4. Discuss the concepts of Individualism and Collectivism and how it influences the view of the child, the parent’s role in the child’s education, and cultural norms.
    5. Summarize the benefits of a strength-based rather than a deficit-based view of the family.
    6. Identify components of protective factors and family resilience.

    Outcome 3:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the early educator’s role in outlining communication methods used to develop trusting relationships with families.

    Objectives:

    1. Summarize ways to share information with families about the teaching and learning goals for the child using multiple presentation strategies.
    2. Demonstrate components of effective written communication that encourages collaboration with families.
      1. Information is provided in the language most comfortable for the family.
    3. Describe the caring style of verbal communication to support trust building with children and families.
    4. Discuss how support and guidance from teachers is essential for children’s positive social development.
    5. Use technology as a tool to communicate with families, collaborate with colleagues, and as a professional resource.
    6. Participate in role play to simulate various forms of parent education and interaction.
    7. Explain potential barriers to successful parent-school partnerships.
    8. Apply NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct to demonstrate a commitment to families.

    Outcome 4:  Upon completion of this course, the student will develop a plan to encourage school-family partnerships with a focus on gaining active involvement from the family in the child’s education.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ways to apply Epstein’s Six Types of Parent Involvement.
    2. Encourage parent’s role in decision-making matters that impact the child and the school.
    3. Describe ways schools can encourage family involvement and volunteerism.
    4. Propose ways the school can create connections and support networks among families with children enrolled in the program.
    5. Plan ways to effectively engage male-role models in the young child’s life.
    6. Identify the impact of family involvement on the development of the child and respect the family’s role as the primary educator.
    7. Support parent and child interaction by way of home activities that promote the child’s learning and development.
    8. Write a philosophy of partnerships with families.

    Outcome 5:  Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the role the community plays in the lives of children.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize how partnerships can be formed with schools and community agencies to support various family needs.
      1. Referrals to community resources and support systems.
      2. Information on subsidized child care and early learning opportunities for children.
    2. Identify ways the community can support families in crisis.
    3. Define social capital.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1 Introduction
    2 Families of today, appreciating diversity, stresses for families
    3 Parent Involvement-Partnerships, standards, barriers, and benefits
    4 Communicating with families, verbal and written
    5 Family resources and advocacy
    6 Cultural Diversity
    7 Cultural Diversity, Part 2
    8 All kinds of families
    9 All kinds of families, Part 2
    10 Parent meetings and education
    11 Written communications with parents
    12 Welcoming families in the classroom
    13 Review
    14, 15 Presentation of Parent Meetings
    16 Completion of Parent Meetings, exam

     


    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1350 - The Arts in Early Education

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210 ECHS 1150  and ECHS 1200  all with grade C or better

    (formerly ECHS 1300)

    This course offers a comprehensive overview of art education for the educator of young children with an emphasis on how art promotes skills and growth across all developmental domains.  Inquiry-based teaching methods will be used to model for students how to engage children in the appreciation of the arts.  Students will construct diverse, process-oriented learning experiences in the Visual, Auditory, Literary and Performing Arts, with focus on integrating arts education into curricula for young children.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to select works of art that will foster children’s interest and exploration.

    Objectives:

    1. Review fine art for its relevance to the young child.
      1. Subject matter
      2. Sensory qualities
      3. Emotional Aspects
    2. Identify the cultural identities of the children being served.
    3. Choose fine art with familiar imagery that is relatable to children and their knowledge of their world, such as nature, or works that support children’s ties to their families and communities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to use an art discussion approach to support the development of art appreciation (thinking about art) in the young child.  

    Objectives:

    1. Illustrate the steps of visual thinking strategies (VTS).  
      1. Appropriate art selection.  
      2. Allow time for silent looking and or listening.  
      3. Posing three specific research-tested questions to motivate and maintain inquiry.
    2. Identify how to link comments to encourage curiosity and learning.  
    3. Solicit conversations from children surrounding the identification of qualities of the work, while being respectful of unique interpretations.
    4. Model Art vocabulary in conversations.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe how to create a classroom environment for The Arts.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret the role of aesthetics in environments for young children.
    2. Select materials.
    3. Organize materials.
    4. Display materials.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to implement inclusive Visual Art activities with young children.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize developmental stages in children’s drawings and paintings to support effective planning.
    2. State rationale for the experience.
    3. Write an activity plan for young children using materials as the medium.
      1. State the observable learning outcome.
      2. State the objectives or experiences that the activity promotes.
      3. Select art tools for young children representative of the kinds of materials and tools used in the industry such as paint, pencil, watercolor, glue, plaster, tempera, clay, chalk, crayons, wood, photographs, ceramics, etc.
      4. State variations in cultural, physical or developmental needs.
      5. Indicate how this Art activity may be linked to academic content areas.
      6. Site appropriate experiential education opportunities in the school’s surroundings and community for young children to connect learning to practical life experiences.
    4. Complete the activity.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to implement Auditory Art activities with young children.

    Objectives:

    1. State rationale for the experience.
    2. Write an activity plan for young children using sound, music or instruments as the medium.
      1. State the observable learning outcome.
      2. State the objectives or experiences that the activity promotes.
      3. Select art instruments and experiences for young children representative of the kinds of materials and tools used by musicians around the world.  Use musical compositions including instrumental, vocal tracks and spoken literary arts such as poetry and rhyme.  When selecting instruments, sounds, and music, choose those from a variety of sounds and genres encompassing many different styles from around the world.
      4. State how you will model listening behaviors when listening to music, and or how you will teach by modelling how to handle and use instruments with care.
      5. State variations in cultural, physical or developmental needs.
      6. Indicate how this Art activity may be linked to academic content areas.
      7. Site appropriate experiential education opportunities in the school’s surroundings and community for young children to connect learning to practical life experiences.
    3. Complete the activity.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to implement inclusive Performing Art activities with young children including theater, music, and dance.

    Objectives:

    1. State rationale for the experience.
    2. Write an activity plan for young children using the child’s presence as the medium.
      1. State the observable learning outcome.
      2. State the objectives or experiences that the activity promotes.
      3. Select art tools for young children representative of the kinds of materials and tools used in the industry such as props, puppetry, compositions, stories, music, costumes, and audio and video recording.
      4. State variations in cultural, physical or developmental needs.
      5. Indicate how this Art activity may be linked to academic content areas.
      6. Site appropriate experiential education opportunities in the school’s surroundings and community for young children to connect learning to practical life experiences. 
    3. Complete the activity.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe how The Arts promote skills and growth across all developmental domains.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify how art exploration enhances Emotional Development.
    2. Identify how art exploration enhances Social Development.
    3. Identify how art exploration enhances Cognitive Development.
    4. Identify how art exploration enhances Language Development.
    5. Identify how art exploration enhances Physical Development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Weeks(s) Topics(s)
    1 Course Overview
    2, 3, 4 Art Appreciation, VTS Strategies, Art Selection
    5, 6, 7, 8 Visual Art and the Young Child
    9, 10 Auditory Art and the Young Child
    11, 12, 13, 14 Performing Arts and the Young Child
    15, 16 Linking Development to the Arts

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1520 - The Exceptional Child

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210; ECHS 1150  and ECHS 1200  all with grade C or better

    This course is designed to help the early childhood educator understand the difference between typical and exceptional development of young children including identification of developmental delays; sensory impairment; physical, learning and behavioral disabilities; and chronic health problems. Methods for planning how environments, curriculum and materials can be adapted to accommodate special needs are identified. Strategies for working with families and collaborating with support services are included. Federal and state legislation, including the state administrated special education code, are studied.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to describe the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA) and other federal and state legislation and how they relate to children and their families.

    Objectives:

    1. Define IDEA, PL 101-476.
    2. State other legislation related to early intervention.
    3. Describe IDEA and other legislation.
    4. Write a paper stating how IDEA and other legislation supports children and their families.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to compare typical and exceptional development of young children (typical, atypical, developmentally delayed, at-risk and gifted).

    Objectives:

    1. Describe characteristics of typically developing children.
    2. State conditions that would cause a child to be developing atypically.
    3. Describe the characteristics of and causes of disabilities and how the development of a child with the disability differs from the development of a typically developing child.
    4. Write a paper describing the causes and classification of a disability and how the development a child with this particular disability differs from the development of a typically developing child.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to describe developmental delays; sensory impairments; physical, learning, and behavioral disabilities; and chronic health problems and plan how environments, curriculum, and materials can be adapted to accommodate children’s individualized needs and to develop strategies to facilitate growth of physical, social, language, cognitive, and self-help skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Define and describe developmental delays; giftedness; sensory impairments; physical, behavioral, and learning disabilities; and chronic health problems.
    2. Identify health problems that accompany a particular disability that must be addressed in the classroom.
    3. Describe how environments and materials can be modified to accommodate disabilities and learning styles.
    4. Write plans for adaptive environments and materials for a particular disability or learning style.
    5. Describe effective guidance techniques used for typically developing children.
    6. Discuss how guidance techniques can be modified to meet the needs of children with various disabilities and learning styles.
    7. Consider a particular disability or learning style, and plan intervention strategies to facilitate growth in social, language, cognitive and self-help skills.
    8. Create an activity for children using pictures as a visual support.
    9. Describe the purpose of an Individualized Family Service Plan (IFSP)/Individualized Education Program (IEP).

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to list strategies for collaboration with families.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the benefits of respectful, reciprocal relationships with families.
    2. Define family-centered practices and family capacity-building practices.
    3. State the importance of professional practices (such as confidentiality and cultural responsiveness) in collaborating with families.
    4. Identify a variety of methods of communicating with families.
    5. Create a home/school communication form.

     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, each student will be able to collaborate and develop partnerships with outside agencies, including early intervention specialists, to provide support services for children and families.

    Objectives:

    1. List support services available for children, families, and those who work with children with disabilities.
    2. Describe what services these agencies have to offer the child and their family.
    3. Create a plan for working with specialists and agencies to implement techniques identified to help a child achieve outcomes and goals.

     


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Early Intervention and Public Policy and Implementing Inclusive Early Childhood Programs
    2. Inclusive Programs for Children
    3. Typical and Exceptional Development
    4. Developmental Disabilities: Causes and Classification
    5. Sensory Impairments: Hearing and Vision and Physical Disabilities and Health Problems
    6. Learning and Behavior Disorders
    7. Partnerships with Families
    8. Assessment and the IFSP/IEAP
    9. Characteristics of Effective Teachers in Inclusive programs
    10. The Developmental-Behavior Approach
    11. Arranging the Learning Environment and Facilitating Self-care, Adaptive, and Independence Skills
    12. Facilitating Social Development, Speech, Language, and Communication Skills
    13. Facilitating Pre academic and Cognitive Learning
    14. Managing Challenging Behavior
    15. Planning Transitions to Support Inclusion

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1550 - Family Child Care Management

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ECHS 1560)

    ECHS 1550 focuses on adapting the home to assure a safe, healthy learning environment, planning multi-age routines and activities, and developing positive child guidance skills. It emphasizes record keeping, menu planning, program marketing, as well as meeting state regulations and standards for National Association of Family Child Care accreditation. Students will complete 6 hours of observation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: state developmental characteristics of infants, toddlers, preschoolers and school-age children.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop a play environment that meets the developmental needs of children from birth through school age.
    2. Develop materials and activities that meet the developmental needs of children from birth through school age.
    3. Be able to explain to parents the value of a play-based learning environment.
    4. Be able to explain to parents how children learn through various activities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: describe positive models of child management and be able to describe how they are used to develop self-esteem and self-discipline.

    Objectives:

    1. State plans for developing and maintaining partnerships with families.
    2. State plans for developing caregiver/child relationships

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: describe adaptations to a home and yard that promotes a safe, healthy learning environment for children from birth through school age.

    Objectives:

    1. Using your own yard, design a safe, healthy learning environment for children from birth through school age.
    2. Develop a list of toys and equipment needed.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: demonstrate child record keeping, marketing, and menu planning for family care.

    Objectives:

    1. Use the provided form and demonstrate simple record keeping
    2. Create a marketing plan for a family child care
    3. Plan a menu for a family child care

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: state how the child care business can impact the provider’s family and develop solutions

    Objectives:

    1. Describe how the provider can balance work and family
    2. Illustrate plans to separate personal space from business space, including plans for common areas that meet the needs of enrolled children and the family

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to: describe the State of Michigan Licensing Rules for Family and Group Care Homes.

    Objectives:

    1. State how your home and policies meet these rules
    2. Describe the Child Development Associate in Family Child Care competencies
    3. Explain how a provider can meet these competencies
    4. Describe the standards of the National Association for Family Child Care accreditation
    5. Explain how a provider can meet these standards

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Review of 1st Day Handout/Introduction to Licensing
    2. Licensing Discussion/Small group Assignment
    3. Beginning the Process of Opening a FCC/Mandated Reporters
    4. Objective Observation/Operating a FCC in your Home
    5. Partnering with Parents
    6. Developing a Handbook of Policies and Procedures/Staffing Paperwork
    7. Setting up a Center/Arranging Space/Choosing Materials/Meeting Standards
    8. Scheduling and Menu Planning
    9. Record Keeping/Tuition/Expense Tracking/Business Use/Taxes
    10. Hiring/Payroll/Insurance
    11. Child Development/Observation/Behavioral Management Strategies
    12. Curriculum Models/Staff Training
    13. Planning Activities that meet the Developmental Needs of Children from Birth through School Age in a Multi-Age Classroom
    14. Marketing/Enrollment
    15. CDA/AA Degrees/Family Child Care Rating Scale/Accreditation
    16. Wrap-up/Review/Reflections

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1580 - School-Age Care

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    No credit after EDUC 1580. This course is designed for the individual working with, or seeking to work with, school-age children. Students will learn the growth and development patterns of children 5-12 years across the physical, social/emotional, cognitive and motor domains. Students will learn the elements of a developmentally appropriate learning environment, as well as plan developmentally appropriate activities. Strategies for promoting problem solving skills, leadership skills, creativity and developing a sense of industry will be presented. Students will also learn how to create reciprocal relationships with families through interactions and practices that respect the diversity of the child and the family.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: On completion of ECHS 1580, the student will be able to identify benchmarks of growth and development for children ages 5-12.

    1. State developmental characteristics of school age children from age 5 through 12.
    2. Describe how activities can be adapted to meet the developmental and cultural needs of school age children.

     

    Outcome 2: On completion of ECHS 1580, the student will be able to discuss tools for observing and assessing children.

    Objectives:

    1. Define “Authentic Assessment”.
    2. Identify appropriate strategies for documenting child development.
    3. Create objective observations of children.

     

    Outcome 3: On completion of ECHS 1580, the student will be able to utilize elements of a high quality learning environment to plan developmentally appropriate activities for children.

    Objectives:

    1. Create a list of materials and supplies for each center necessary in a school age environment.
    2. Create activity plans for classroom activities.
    3. Create an a.m. and p.m. program schedule.
    4. Create a full day program schedule.
    5. Create a week long lesson plan.

     

    Outcome 4: On completion of ECHS 1580, the student will be able to determine appropriate child guidance strategies and effective relationship building strategies.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe child guidance techniques.
    2. State social-emotional characteristics of school age children.
    3. Identify appropriate strategies for conflict resolution and promoting self-esteem and self-discipline.
    4. Describe strategies for peer engagement.

     

    Outcome 5: On completion of ECHS 1580, the student will be able to identify effective strategies for creating partnerships with families, which respect the diversity of the children and their families.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe how the diversity of families is respected in the program.
    2. Describe practices for communicating with families.
    3. Describe practices for including families in the program.
    4. Describe practices for meeting the individual needs of children.

     

    Outcome 6: On completion of ECHS 1580 students will outline practices for incorporating child leadership in the program.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the benefits of shared control in the classroom.
    2. Describe practices for sharing control with children.
    3. Describe how the program promotes self-help skills and independence.

     

    Outcome 7: On completion of ECHS 1580 the student will identify practices that ensure the safety and wellness of children.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe practices for fire and tornado safety according to licensing regulations.
    2. Describe practices for maintaining cleanliness in a classroom.
    3. Create a list of expectations for behavior on field trips.
    4. Create a list of expectations for behavior within the classroom.

     

    Outcome 8: On completion of ECHS 1580 the student will identify resources in the community which support the program.

    Objectives:

    1. Create a list of field trips for children.
    2. Identify family support services in the community.

     

    Outcome 9: On completion of ECHS 1580 the student will incorporate ethical practices into their plans for a high quality learning environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Review the “Code of Ethical Conduct” from the National Association for the Education of Young Children.
    2. Describe appropriate responses and practices to classroom situations based on the “Code of Ethical Conduct”.

     

    Outcome 10: On completion of ECHS 1580 the student will plan for their continued professional development.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify resources for professional development.
    2. Create a personal plan for continued professional development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1 Characteristics of caregivers
    2-3 Child/Youth Growth and Development
    4 Social Competence/Conflict Resolution
    5 Safety and Wellness
    6 Families
    7 Community Resources
    8 Quality and Standards
    9 Program Administration
    10-11 Program Planning
    12-14 Curriculum/Activity Planning
    15 Professional Development

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Alward, Brenda
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1710 - Child Care Management

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1150  and ECHS 1200  all with grade C or better

    This course will focus on the administration of early care and education programs to support the student in developing the necessary knowledge and skills to manage programs and lead staff. The student will demonstrate the ability to maintain a healthy and inclusive environment, assure developmentally appropriate curriculum, manage a budget, create hiring and evaluation criteria for staff, describe effective family communication, meet licensing regulations, and demonstrate an awareness of NAEYC accreditation criteria and procedures.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to compare and contrast various program philosophy statements.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Identify goals contained in a philosophy.
    2. Design developmentally appropriate activities to meet goals contained in the philosophy.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the financial responsibilities of an administrator.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Review financial documents with the purpose of identifying ways to improve the program’s fiscal position.
      1. Budgeting - Income and expenses
      2. Record Keeping
      3. Fundraising
    2. Develop a marketing plan.
    3. Create a marketing flyer.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze the State of Michigan childcare licensing regulations to determine program compliance.

    OBJECTIVES:

    1. Examine licensing regulations to plan appropriate practices and routines for early care and education programs.
    2. Identify regulations for maintaining a safe and healthy environment.
    3. Plan a weekly menu
    4. Design a health and safety practices plan.
    5. Identify regulations for fire, tornado and emergency incidents.
    6. Outline the caregiver to child ratio requirements for programs. Include all age groups of children.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to design criteria for the employment process; including hiring, evaluation, termination, and opportunities for professional development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe effective personnel management and leadership qualities.
    2. Create a job posting.
    3. Review resumes and choose appropriate candidates to interview.
    4. Construct questions to be used during the interview.
    5. Create a formal assessment tool to evaluate staff performance.
    6. Measure staff competency at designing curriculum.
    7. Create a staff improvement plan.
    8. Implement a staff training presentation.
    9. Describe professional development opportunities available for early educators.
    10. Interview a director.

     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify elements of effective communication to support staff and family involvement in the program.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain factors needed to create a diverse and inclusive environment.
    2. Develop a plan for communicating with parents and staff.
    3. Describe ways schools can encourage family involvement.
    4. Outline conflict resolution strategies.
    5. Plan a family event.

     

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the National Association for the Education of Young Children’s accreditation standards and process of evaluation and accreditation.

    Objectives:

    1. Use the standards to plan effective routines and practices.
    2. Use standards to evaluate program practices and curriculum.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week Topic
    1 Employment criteria
    2 Administrator responsibilities
    3 Philosophy, goals and objectives
    4-5 Marketing, Licensing
    6 Developmentally appropriate activities for all ages, NAEYC guidelines
    7-8 Nutrition, food policies and regulations, building maintenance, health and safety
    9-10 Staff issues
    11 Working with families
    12 Finances
    13-15 Program quality, accreditation standards

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Alward, Brenda
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 1801 - CDA Credential Preparation

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1100 ; and ECHS 1150  or ECHS 1200  or ECHS 1550 ; all with grade C or better

    (formerly ECHS 1815)

    This course supports the potential CDA candidate in gathering data to complete the Professional Portfolio, prepare for Verification Visit as well as the CDA Credential Exam. The CDA National Credentialing Program is a professional development opportunity for early educators working with children ages zero to five years old to teach basic principles in early education and child development in 6 Competency Standards and 13 Functional Areas. The National Association for the Education of Young Children (NAEYC) recognizes the CDA as a beginning stepping stone on the path of career advancement in early childhood education. The CDA credential is awarded by the Council for Professional Recognition. With prerequisites this course completes the 120 hours of necessary formal early childhood education training required for the CDA.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able promote child development and learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand principles of child development and learning.
    2. Plan a safe and healthy learning environment.
      1. Safe: provide a safe environment to prevent and reduce injuries.
      2. Healthy: promote good health and nutrition and provide an environment that contributes to the prevention of illness.
      3. Learning Environment: use space, relationships, materials, and routines as resources for constructing an interesting, secure, and enjoyable environment that encourages and fosters trust, play, exploration, interaction, and learning.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to build family and community relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Building productive relationships with families.
      1. Families: establish a positive, cooperative relationship with each child’s family, encourage their involvement in the program, and support the child’s relationship with his or her family.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe how to observe, document, and assess to support young children and families.

    Objectives:

    1. Observing and recording children’s behavior.
      1. Assessment: understand the goals, benefits, and uses of assessment, including its use in development of appropriate goals, curriculum, and teaching strategies for young children.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to use developmentally effective approaches to connect with children and families.

    Objectives:

    1. Support children’s social and emotional development.
    2. Advance children’s physical and intellectual development.
      1. Physical: provide a variety of developmentally appropriate equipment, learning experiences, and teaching strategies to promote the physical development of children.
      2. Cognitive: provide activities and opportunities that encourage curiosity, exploration, and problem solving appropriate to the developmental levels of each child.
      3. Communication: actively communicates with children and provides opportunities and support for children to understand, acquire, and use verbal and nonverbal means of communicating thoughts and feelings.
      4. Creative: provide opportunities that stimulate children to play with sound, rhythm, language, materials, space and ideas in individual ways and to express their creative abilities.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to use content knowledge to build meaningful curriculum.

    Objectives:

    1. Support children’s social and emotional development.
      1. Self: provide a warm, positive, supportive relationship with each child, and help each child learn about and take pride in his or her individual and cultural identity.
      2. Social: help each child feel accepted in the group, help children learn to communicate and get along with others, and encourage feelings of empathy and mutual respect among children and adults.
      3. Guidance: provide a supportive environment and use effective strategies to help all children learn and practice appropriate and acceptable behaviors as individuals and as a group, and effectively provide support for children with persistent challenging behaviors.
    2. Advance children’s physical and intellectual development.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to show professional growth.

    Objectives:

    1. Managing an effective program.
      1. Program Management: use all available resources to ensure an effective operation; a competent organizer, planner, record keeper, communicator, and a cooperative coworker.
    2. Maintaining a commitment to professionalism.
      1. Professionalism: make decisions based on knowledge of researched-based early childhood practices, promote high-quality child care services, and take advantage of opportunities to improve knowledge and competence, both for personal and professional growth and for the benefit of children and families.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1. Introduction
    Overview of CDA Application Process
    Organizing the Professional Resource File
    Locating Resource Items
    Choosing a Professional Development Specialist
     
    Week 2. Overview Of The Responsibilities Of A Professional Early Educator
    Understanding of the Areas of Competence
    Writing Statements of Competence
    Competency Standard 1: Managing and Maintaining a Safe, Healthy Learning Environment
    Mandated Reporters

    Week 3. Observing And Recording Children’s Behavior
    Competency Standard 2: Advancing Physical and Intellectual Competence
    Planning Lessons Based On Observations
    NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct-Responsibility to Children
    Statement of Competence 1 Due

    Week 4. Maintaining An Emotionally Healthy Environment
    Adult-Child Relationships
    Relationships with Coworkers
    Competency Standard 3: Supporting Social and Emotional Development and Providing Positive Guidance
    Statement of Competence 2 Due

    Week 5. Working With Families
    Understanding Families of Today and Their Challenges
    Competency Standard 4: To Establish Positive and Productive Relationships with Families
    NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct-Responsibility to Families

    Week 6. Working With Families, Continued
    Effective Communication Strategies
    Epstein’s Six Types of Parent Involvement
    Statement of Competence 3 Due

    Week 7. Community Resources
    Developing a Family Resource Guide
    School and Community Relationships
    NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct-Ethical Responsibility to Community and Society
    Statement of Competence 4 Is Due

    Week 8. Management
    Competency Standard 5: To Ensure a Well-Run, Purposeful Program That Is Responsive To Participants Needs
    NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct, Ethical Responsibility to Colleagues
    Recordkeeping Strategies
    Child Portfolios

    Week 9. Family Questionnaires
    Strategies for Distribution and Collection

    Week 10. Professionalism
    Advocacy
    Ethical Dilemmas
    Competency Standard 6: Maintaining a Commitment to Professionalism
    Statement of Competence 5 Is Due

    Week 11. Professionalism, Continued
    Networking
    Professional Development Opportunities
    Writing a Philosophy Statement
    Statement of Competence 6 Is Due
    NAEYC’s Statement of Commitment

    Week 12. Preparing Your Professional Portfolio
    Completing and Collecting Activity Plans
    Practice Quiz

    Week 13. Professional Portfolio Continued
    Bibliography of Children’s Books
    Collection of Resource Items RC I-1, 2, and 3, RC V, RC VI-1, 2, and 3


    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 2000 - Guidance & Behavior

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1190  or ENGL 1220 ECHS 1250  and ECHS 1710  all with grade C or better

    This course provides an introduction to recognizing, addressing, and preventing challenging and disruptive behaviors, with an overview of social emotional milestones, observation and documentation, factors that influence behavior, appropriate guidance techniques and prevention strategies.  Students will learn that behaviors communicate a message, and that relationship building and evidence-based guidance techniques foster mental health and well-being which results in social competence and adaptive outcomes.  This course is designed to serve early educators, paraeducation professionals and elementary teachers working with children ages zero to eight years old.  Students will complete 10 hours of observation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify influences on behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Biological factors
      1. Prenatal development
      2. Genes
      3. Gender
      4. Health
      5. Temperament
    2. Interpersonal Relationships
      1. Familial influences
      2. Attachment
      3. Cultural practices
      4. Trauma - violence, abuse, addiction or neglect or chronic health problem or disability of a family member.
    3. Environmental factors
      1. Housing
      2. Nutrition
      3. Toxins and pollution
      4. Community resources
      5. Economic and employment status
      6. Education

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to determine stages of development from infancy through early elementary.

    Objectives:

    1. Emotional Development
    2. Social Development
    3. Cognitive Development
    4. Language Development
    5. Physical Development

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify key social and emotional milestones for young children.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpersonal Relationships - Establishing emotional connections with others.
    2. Self-Awareness - Developing a sense of themselves as individuals.
    3. Self-Regulation - The control of emotion, attention and physiological responses to stimulation.
    4. Social Competence - Social skills, social awareness and self-confidence.
    5. Autonomy / Agency - Decision making skills, independence and responsibility.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to assess behavior through the use of observation.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the value of observation.
    2. Clarify the difference between objective and subjective recording techniques.
    3. Identify professional and ethical considerations to observing.
    4. Observe and record using various assessment methods.
      1. Anecdotal Record
      2. Developmental Checklist
      3. Frequency Count
      4. Event Sample
      5. Time Sample
      6. Running Record
    5. Interpret data collected.
      1. Identify the personality and dimensions of the child (interests, needs, developmental level).
      2. View children in the context of family, culture, and community.
      3. Acknowledge that life circumstances and past experiences can contribute to or stifle development.
      4. Concede that observers’ perceptions of behaviors may be biased, and that because of this it is crucial for observers to make efforts to be aware and focused on truly seeing the child.
    6. Describe how observations can be shared with colleagues and families.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to modify classroom schedules, routines and environments that encourage inappropriate behaviors.

    Objectives:

    1. Schedule
      1. Addresses child’s physiological needs
      2. Ratio of adults to children
      3. Balance of activities organized around care routines
      4. Consistent and predictable
    2. Routine
      1. Rules
      2. Rituals
      3. Transitions
    3. Environment
      1. Space
      2. Design
      3. Materials
      4. Organization
      5. Visual stimulation
      6. Aesthetics

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify appropriate child guidance techniques to address and prevent challenging behaviors.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine developmentally appropriate approaches to child guidance.
      1. Provide positive attention and active listening
      2. Model prosocial behavior
      3. Label feelings
      4. Provide choices
      5. Demonstrate calming techniques
      6. Use natural and logical consequences
      7. Scaffold conflict resolution strategies
      8. Positive reinforcement - descriptive praise, encouragement and acknowledgement of proper behavior.
      9. Direct guidance, clear limits, explanations of appropriate behavior

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to initiate a behavior intervention plan.

    Objectives:

    1. State how early educators can collaborate with the child’s family, colleagues, resource and referral organizations and other professionals to work together for the good of the child.       
    2. Collect information through objective observation and documentation.
      1. Seek out family input.
      2. Notate antecedents and events or conditions that increase or trigger the behavior as well as the consequence of the behavior.
      3. Notate all factors and patterns related to the behavior such as time, location, activities and other persons who may be present.
    3. Identify what could be the intended message of the behavior - what does the child hope to gain or escape from.
    4. Determine the goal for intervention
      1. Increase social competence
      2. Enhance self-esteem
      3. Promote a healthy expression of emotions
      4. Encourage children’s self-regulation and self-control
      5. Support autonomy
    5. Determine prevention strategies - attempt to mitigate behaviors.
    6. Determine appropriate child guidance techniques.
    7. Establish expectations for outcome behaviors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1 Course Synopsis
    2 Influences on Behavior
    3 Stages of Development
    4 Social and Emotional Milestones
    5, 6 & 7 Observation, Recording and Assessment
    8 & 9 Prevention Strategies - Classroom Rules, Schedules, Routines and Environments
    10 & 11 Developmentally Appropriate Guidance Techniques
    12 & 13 Challenging Behavior Scenarios
    14 & 15 Child Case Studies
    16 Wrap Up

     


    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 2220 - Planning & Teaching the Early Childhood Curriculum

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1150  and ECHS 1200  all with grade C or better

    (formerly ECHS 2100 and ECHS 2110)

    Developmentally appropriate strategies for education will be used in planning and implementing the early childhood curricula that includes all developmental and academic content areas for the young child. Students will apply early childhood theory in creating environments that are healthy, respectful, supportive and challenging for each child. Students will practice using authentic assessment to document young children’s learning. Documentation of a negative TB test, an Internet criminal background check (ICHAT), and DHS Central Registry is required. Students will complete 30 hours of observation in a preschool or child care center with preschool age children.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    1. Based on their knowledge of young children’s characteristics, needs and the multiple influences on development, students will design classroom environments that are healthy, respectful, supportive and challenging for young children.

    • Identify elements of a healthy, respectful, supportive and challenging environment
    • Explain the multiple influences on development
    • Describe how the environment supports social/emotional and physical development
    • Choose materials for classroom environments and explain how they can support special needs
    • Design a classroom environment
    • Develop a daily routine that considers all developmental and learning components.
    • Create transition activities

    2. Know, understand and use a variety of developmentally appropriate teaching strategies. Explain how positive relationships and supportive interactions are the foundation of the early childhood curriculum

    • Describe scaffolding techniques and it’s role in a supportive environment
    • Give examples for adapting teaching techniques, environments, materials and activities for the special needs of individual children
    • Give examples of how technology is used with young children.

    3. Use their own knowledge and other resources to design, implement, and evaluate challenging curriculum that promotes the comprehensive developmental and learning outcomes for the individual needs of children

    • Use their knowledge of the sequence of language and literacy learning to create and implement activities and curriculum based on the interests and needs of each child and link to assessment objectives.
    • Create and implement a name recognition activity for and early childhood classroom linking it to assessment objectives. Analyze the results.
    • Choose quality literature for young children, analyze the elements of quality literature, demonstrate reading to a group and model extending the story for a richer literacy experience.
    • Use their knowledge of the sequence of learning for mathematics to create materials and implement activities that meet the developmental needs of young children and link to assessment objectives. Analyze the results.
    • Use their own knowledge of children’s understanding of social studies concepts to develop a social studies unit that is based on young children’s interests
    • Understand developmentally appropriate science concepts, create, implement and analyze a science activity for young children that links to assessment objectives.
    • Write comprehensive lesson plans that include all content areas of the curriculum and developmental areas of the child.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week 1 Elements of the curriculum. Connecting activities to assessments.
    Week 2 Planning the integrated curriculum. Analyzing the daily routine. Healthy Snacks.
    Week 3 Physical development: activities and materials for large and small motor development.
    Week 4 The Role of the Classroom in Learning
    Week 5 Language and literacy development. Transitions in the classroom.
    Week 6 Exploring and using print. Incorporating literacy into the classroom.
    Week 7 Children’s literature. Using literature for content areas. Development of writing.
    Week 8 The Inquiry Process.
    Week 9 The Social Studies Curriculum
    Week 10 Math in the Early Childhood Curriculum
    Week 11 Developing math materials and activities
    Week 12 Science in the Early Childhood Curriculum
    Week 13 Developing science materials and activities
    Week 14 Sensory Materials, Connecting all areas of the curriculum
    Week 15 Presentation of curriculum projects.
    Week 16 Review and reflection

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 2315 - Advocacy for Educators

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1190  or ENGL 1220 ECHS 1710  and ECHS 2220  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: ECHS 2330  and ECHS 2550  

    (formerly ECHS 2310)

    This course provides an introductory overview of public policies that impact families, young children and Early Education professionals. This course emphasizes the knowledge and application of ethical standards and professional responsibilities of Early Education teachers and focuses on influencing public policy and engaging in informed advocacy.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to think critically and prospectively about state and national policies surrounding the field of Early Education.

    Objectives:   

    1. Identify themselves as a professional in the field of early education.
    2. Illustrate professionalism by being knowledgeable of public policies.  
    3. Students will understand that national governance and finance either impedes or supports Early Education policy.  
    4. Demonstrate the ability to advocate by getting to know the elected officials at all levels. 
    5. Compose a persuasive letter to a legislator advocating for the rights of children, families, educational settings or teachers.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use the NAEYC Code of Ethical Conduct to solve ethical dilemmas that occur in the field of Early Education.

    Objectives:   
    1. Describe the NAEYC Code of Ethical Conduct.
    2. Define ethical dilemma.
    3. Define ethical responsibility.
    4. Use the code to analyze guidelines for responsible behavior concerning ethical dilemmas and responsibilities.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop an advocacy plan.

    Objectives:   
    1. Identify and prioritize major issues in the field of Early Education.
    2. Develop an advocacy project for the local area that relates to issues impacting young children. 
        a. Select a targeted group.
        b. Define advocacy goals and objectives. 
        c. Assess resources.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement an advocacy plan.

    Objectives:   
    1. Identify classmates interested in the topic and create a group.
        a. Plan meetings either on-ground or through social media to communicate about the advocacy plan.
    2. Outline specific activities required for advocacy plan.
        a. Define sources needed to elicit assistance.
        b. Assign group members to tasks.
    3. Evaluate the outcome.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Weeks  Topics
    1 - 4

    With resources provided, students will work collaboratively to identify and prioritize major issues in the field of Early Education. 

    Students will decide upon an Advocacy Project and will define the goals and objectives, select the targeted group and outline the specific activities they will do to provide support.

    Students will begin working on implementing the project.

    5 - 9 Students will use the NAEYC Code of Ethical Conduct to analyze guidelines for responsible behavior in the field of Early Education.
    Using NAEYC’s Code of Ethical Conduct students will solve hypothetical ethical dilemmas that transpire in everyday classrooms throughout the nation.  
    Students will collaborate and reflect on what they believe are their ethical responsibilities to children.  
     
    Students will continue working on implementing the advocacy project.
    10 - 13 Identify and prioritize major issues in the field of Early Education and individually choose a policy topic that relates to issues impacting young children. Students will research legislation surrounding their chosen topic and will write a persuasive letter to the legislator (either state or federal depending on the issue) defining the importance of the topic while providing evidence supporting their argument.
     
    Students will continue working on implementing the advocacy project.
    14 - 16 Students will conclude the advocacy project and gather data evaluating the effectiveness and impact of their project.

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 2330 - Early Childhood Practicum

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1710  and ECHS 2220  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: ECHS 2315  and ECHS 2550  

    (formerly ECHS 2320)

    In this practicum student teaching experience, students are guided by a college instructor and a qualified cooperating teacher to support them in assuming the role and responsibilities of a classroom teacher. Students will demonstrate acquired skills by assessing the growth and development of preschool children through observations and interactions with children. Concurrent study and field experiences help bridge theory and practice to plan, implement, and evaluate learning activities of both the individual child and for groups of young children.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate respectful, reciprocal relationship skills with children, staff, and families.

    Objectives:

    1. Participate in classroom routines, guiding children, and planning activities.
    2. Communicate effectively with teaching staff.
    3. Demonstrate the ability to communicate with all children.
    4. Demonstrate the ability to communicate with families.
    5. Demonstrate the ability to use prevention, redirection, logical consequences and problem solving appropriately in the classroom.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to plan and implement an inclusive and developmentally appropriate unit focused on children’s interests.

    Objectives:

    1. Collaborate with supervising teacher to develop a unit or study.
    2. Develop a week long lesson plan based on an agreed upon study or unit.
    3. Write unit goals for both content and skills.
    4. Plan for all areas of learning, including art, blocks, dramatic play, language and literacy, math, physical skills, science, sensory, and social studies.
    5. Plan and implement inclusive, developmentally appropriate large and small group activities that are skill specific and related to assessment objectives.
    6. Use problem solving and questions to guide children to a new understanding.
    7. Incorporate active learning principles in all areas of the curriculum.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to implement a child assessment.

    Objectives:

    1. Observe children objectively.
    2. Write objective observation notes to document assessment.
    3. Organize anecdotal notes and other documentation under appropriate domains.
    4. Complete an assessment form using information obtained from observation notes and other documentation.
    5. Write a summary of the child’s learning in each domain.
    6. Use completed assessment to provide direction for curriculum development.
    7. Evaluate the goals, benefits, and uses of assessment.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course students will be able to summarize health and safety routines for young children.

    Objectives:

    1. Outline safety risks and emergency preparedness procedures in the classroom setting.
    2. Describe typical health management policies such as: food safety, communicable diseases, toileting, napping and staff well being.
    3. Describe the teacher’s role in modeling good health, safety and nutrition habits.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course content is reflected in practicum experiences in Field Practicum weeks 1 - 16. This is based on the individual practicum classroom curriculum.
    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECHS 2550 - Early Childhood Practicum Seminar

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECHS 1710  and ECHS 2220  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: ECHS 2315  and ECHS 2330  

    (formerly ECHS 2340)

    This course is designed to support students in integrating educational theory with practicum field work experiences. Students participate in weekly discussions that both analyze and support their field work experiences to guide them in delivering effective evidence-based developmentally and culturally appropriate early learning experiences for young children. Additional emphasis is placed on the student’s professional preparation in the field of early education.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will be able to participate in critical discussion relevant to their role as an early educator.

    Objectives:

    1. Participate in both face to face group discussions, and online discussion forums.
    2. Demonstrate a high level of oral, written and technological communication skills.
    3. Demonstrate the ability to work collaboratively toward a common goal.
    4. Reflect upon professional growth.
    5. Seek knowledge to improve practice.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize theory or research to explain best practices in early education.

    Objectives:

    1. Define Developmentally Appropriate Practice.
    2. Describe the central role of play to development and learning.
    3. Explain equity in relation to how early educators can create safe and supportive learning environments that value family and community partnerships.
    4. Describe how teachers of young children integrate knowledge of academic content areas and developmental domains into curriculum design.
    5. Define best practices in; assessment, curriculum design, instructional technology, guidance, communication methods, equity and inclusion, relationship building, and health and safety for early care and education settings.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to outline professional responsibilities of an early educator.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the professional development continuum for early educators.
    2. Identify professional educational and career goals.
    3. Participate in professional associations.
      1. Identify local, state, regional and national conferences and events for early educators.
    4. Illustrate professional accomplishments.
      1. Create a professional portfolio.
      2. Develop a current resume.
      3. Compile program wide curricular content to construct a final overall teaching philosophy.
    5. Describe characteristics of a successful leader.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. This course is designed to support students in integrating educational theory with practicum field work experiences. Topics are discussed weekly and determined based upon what is happening within the placement sites, so there is quite a bit of variability from semester to semester.  All outcomes and objectives are achieved by the end of the term.
    2. Critical reflection of professional growth.
    3. Best Practices including Developmentally Appropriate curriculum development.
    4. Responsibilities of an Early Educator.

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Economics

  
  • ECON 1160 - Principles of Economics 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An introduction to basic principles of economics with an emphasis on macroeconomic theory. This course of study will include an analysis of national income, employment, and prices, and conclude with a discussion of monetary and fiscal policies. It is recommended that students should follow ECON 1160 with ECON 1170 for a more complete introduction to economics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the particular and distinctive economic terminology, concepts, and tools. These include the ability to define and apply the following:

    Objectives:

    1. Concept of demand and supply.
    2. Gross domestic product [GDP].
    3. Aggregate demand and aggregate supply.
    4. Neoclassical economic theory.
    5. Keynesian economic theory.
    6. Multiplier analysis and fiscal policy.
    7. Functions of money and money supply.
    8. Banking system and mechanism of money creation.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to understand and use basic economic quantitative information- statistical data. These include the ability to:

    Objectives:

    1. Determine price and quantity changes when demand and/or supply change.
    2. Determine the GDP, GNP, NDP, NI, PI, and DI.
    3. Explain the functioning of economic indexes.
    4. Describe the unemployment rate.
    5. Calculate APC, APS, MPC, MPS, and income multiplier.
    6. Calculate reserve requirements, monetary multiplier, and changes in money supply.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of people, events, ideas, institutions, and historic movements, which have contributed significantly to the development of a free market economic system in the United States. These include:

    Objectives:

    1. Understanding the private-household-consumption and business-investment-sectors.
    2. Understanding the government sector and federal government’s fiscal and monetary policies.
    3. Understanding the economic role of the major governmental entities.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of basic concepts of economics as applied to personal and public decision-making. Students should understand different economic opinions on the following:

    Objectives:

    1. Distinguish between different types of taxes.
    2. Understand causes of unemployment and inflation.
    3. Understand the role of savings, investment, and capital accumulation.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the major economic problems of the day and policy options to deal with such problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Taxation.
    2. Employment.
    3. Business cycle.
    4. Federal budget deficits.
    5. Federal government debt.
    6. Free markets.
    7. Black [illegal] markets.
    8. Underground economy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Economic Models
      1. Market
      2. Command
      3. Circular Flow
    2. Market Equilibrium
      1. Demand
      2. Supply
      3. Price Floor
      4. Price Ceiling
    3. Measuring Output and Income
      1. Expenditures approach
      2. Income approach
      3. NI
      4. PI
      5. DI
    4. Business Cycle
      1. Unemployment
      2. Inflation
    5. Aggregate Expenditures Model
      1. Planned vs. Actual S and I
      2. Lump Sum Tax
      3. Expenditure Gap
    6. Fiscal Policy Deficits Debt
      1. Discretionary Non-discretionary
      2. Actual Full-employment
      3. Domestic vs. Foreign Public Debt
    7. Money and Banking
      1. M1 M2
      2. Structure of the Federal Reserve
      3. Functions of the Federal Reserve
      4. Money Creation
    8. Monetary Policy
      1. Open Market Operations
      2. Reserve Requirements
      3. Discount Rate

    Primary Faculty
    Trueman, Mark
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECON 1170 - Principles of Economics 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECON 1160 

    A continuation of the basic principles of economics with an introduction to microeconomic theory. This course of study will include an analysis of supply and demand and the decision-making processes of firms in perfectly and imperfectly competitive markets.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the particular and distinctive economic terminology, concepts, and tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Concepts of demand and supply.
    2. The elasticity of demand.
    3. The elasticity of supply.
    4. Marginal and total utilities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to understand and use basic economic quantitative information-statistical data.

    Objectives:

    1. Calculate fixed, variable, total, and marginal costs.
    2. Calculate and graph average and marginal cost curves.
    3. Explain the economic and accounting profits.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of a perfectly competitive market structure.

    Objectives:

    1. Graph and explain the perfect competitor.
    2. Describe and analyze graphically the firm’s profit-making, break-even, and shut-down conditions.
    3. Analyze the short and long run market conditions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of a monopolistic market structure.

    Objectives:

    1. Graph and explain the monopolist.
    2. Describe and analyze graphically the firm’s profit-maximizing, break-even, and shut-down conditions.
    3. Analyze the short and long run market conditions.
    4. Explain “natural monopoly”.
    5. Describe and analyze limits on monopoly power.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of a monopolistically competitive market structure.

    Objectives:

    1. Graph and explain the monopolistic competition.
    2. Describe and analyze graphically the firm’s profit maximizing, break-even, and shut-down conditions.
    3. Analyze the short and long run market conditions.
    4. Explain and give examples of price discrimination.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of an oligopolistic market structure.

    Objectives:

    1. Graph and explain the oligopolist.
    2. Describe and analyze graphically the firm’s profit maximizing, break-even, and shut-down conditions.
    3. Analyze the short and long run market conditions.
    4. Define and analyze collusion.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of resource markets.

    Objectives:

    1. Inelastic demand for land.
    2. Henry George Theory of Land Rents.
    3. MRP of capital.
    4. Least cost and profit maximizing model for labor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. International economics
      1. Comparative advantage vs. Absolute advantage
      2. Exchange Rates
      3. Protectionism vs. Free-trade d) Balance of Payments
    2. Elasticity
      1. Percentage Test/ Total Revenue Test
      2. Supply elasticity
      3. Necessity/luxury goods
    3. Market Structures
      1. Pure competition
      2. Monopoly
      3. Monopolistic competition
      4. Oligopoly
    4. Resource Markets
      1. Labor least cost/ profit maximizing
      2. Union models
      3. Monopsony
      4. Bilateral monopoly
      5. Rents/ inelastic supply
      6. Capital marker

    Primary Faculty
    Trueman, Mark
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ECON 2110 - International Economics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ECON 1160 

    This course serves as an introduction to international trade and finance. It examines the structure of international trade and the functioning of the international monetary system. Attention is given to recent issues in these areas and the relationship between domestic and international economies.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to compare and contrast key international organizations in terms of their unique roles in facilitating trade, finance, economic development, and stability.

    Objectives:

    1. Provide a general overview of the growth of globalization since World War II.
    2. Identify the major issues facing the international economies today.
    3. Evaluate the history and functions of three key international institutions in the global economy.
    4. Examine the role of regional trade agreements in the global economy.
    5. Analyze the arguments opposing international economic institutions.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to analyze the theory of trade and the predicted net costs of protectionist measures.

    Objectives:

    1. Contrast comparative advantage with both absolute advantage and competitiveness.
    2. Model and analyze how nations maximize their material welfare by specializing in goods and services.
    3. Analyze the factors which may cause differences in countries’ comparative advantage:
      1. Heckscher-Ohlin model
    4. Evaluate economic models of trade in terms of their impacts on income distribution:
      1. Stolper-Samuelson theorem
      2. Specific factors model
    5. Model and analyze the distinction between tariffs and quotas, and explain their benefits and costs to an economy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to compare and contrast the theory of trade and protectionist measures with observed trade patterns.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate the results of empirical tests on comparative advantage.
    2. Explain why many countries import the same goods that they export.
    3. Analyze the development of regional clusters of production of many exported goods and services.
    4. Examine how and why many countries select and plan the development of their export industries.
    5. Examine the estimated dollar costs of the effects of tariffs and quotas in the European Union, the U.S., and Japan in the agriculture, clothing, and textile industries.
    6. Analyze the most common reasons for countries to protect certain industries.
    7. Identify other mechanisms used to provide industry protection.
    8. Identify the remaining obstacles to international economic integration: national laws, regulations, and standards.
    9. Analyze the relationship between trade flows and labour standards, and between trade flows and environmental standards.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to analyze global financial practices.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the three major parts of the international balance of payments, and understand the use of the most commonly posted accounting entries.
    2. Explain the relationships between domestic investment, domestic savings, and the international flows of goods, services, and financial assets.
    3. Model and analyze the use of fixed, floating, and crawling peg exchange rate systems.
    4. Analyze the relationship between the balance of payments and the exchange rate to each other and to the national economy.
      1. Focus particularly on the interactions of the current account, exchange rates, consumption, investment, and government spending.
    5. Examine how macroeconomic policies affect the exchange rate and the current account.
    6. Examine the ways in which financial crises develop and spread, and identify mechanisms to either prevent or remedy such crises once they begin.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction: The United States in a Global Economy
      1. Elements of International Economic Integration
      2. Index of Openness
      3. Twelve Themes in International Economics
    2. Major International Governmental Organizations
      1. International Public Goods
      2. The International Monetary Fund (IMF), World Bank, and the World Trade Organization (WTO)
      3. Multilateral Trade Agreements- WTO negotiating rounds d. Regional Trade Agreements (RTAs)
      4. Criticism of International Institutions
    3. Traditional Theory of the Gains from Trade
      1. Economic Nationalism (Mercantilism)
      2. Absolute Productivity Advantage
      3. Comparative Advantage
      4. Absolute and Comparative Advantage Contrasted
      5. Comparative Advantage and Competitiveness
    4. Modern Trade Theory
      1. Comparative Advantage and Factor Endowments
      2. Heckscher-Ohlin (HO) Model Predictions
      3. Specific Factors Model Predictions
      4. Impact of Trade on Wages and Jobs
      5. Empirical Tests of the Theory of Comparative Advantage
    5. More Reasons to Trade
      1. Intraindustry Trade
      2. Geography, Transportation costs, and Internal Economies of Scale
      3. External Economies
      4. Justification for Industrial Policy (Government Intervention)
    6. Theory of Tariffs and Quotas (Costs of Protection)
      1. Consumer and Producer Surplus
      2. Consumption and Efficiency Losses, and Other Potential Costs of Tariffs
      3. Small Country Case Contrasted with Large Country Case
      4. Revenue Effects and Deadweight Losses Associated with Quotas
      5. Quotas and Tariffs Contrasted in Terms of Efficiency
      6. Other Types of Protectionist Measures
    7. Commercial Policy and Jobs
      1. Protection in the European Union, U.S., and Japan- particularly agriculture, clothing, textiles
      2. Empirical Costs of Protection
      3. Impact of Protection on Developing Countries
      4. Arguments for Protection
      5. Common Forms of (Paths to) Protection
      6. Alternative Policies (Macro and Labor Market Policies) for Protection
    8. International Trade and Labor and Environmental Standards
      1. Harmonization, Mutual Recognition, or Separate
      2. Evidence of Low Labor Standards as a Predatory Practice
      3. International Labor Organization
      4. Transboundary and Non-transboundary Effects of Trade on the Environment
    9. Trade and the Balance of Payments
      1. Introduction to the Current Account, Financial Account, and Capital Account
      2. The Current Account and the Macroeconomy
      3. International Investment Position
    10. Exchange Rates and Exchange Rate Systems
      1. Reasons for Currency Trading and Exchange Rate Risk
      2. The Supply and Demand for Foreign Exchange (Flexible Exchange Rate System)
      3. Determinants of Exchange Rates in the Short-run, Medium-run, and Long-run
      4. Purchasing Power Parity
      5. Interest Rate Parity
      6. The Nominal versus the Real Exchange Rate
      7. Fixed and Pegged (In-Between) Exchange Rate Systems
    11. Open Economy Macroeconomics
      1. Role of Fiscal and Monetary Policies on Interest Rates, Exchange Rates, Current Accounts, and Business and Consumer Decision Making
      2. Addressing Macroeconomic Imbalances
      3. Expenditure-Switching and Expenditure-Reducing Policies
      4. Effectiveness of Coordination Policies
    12. Recent International Financial Crises
      1. Challenge of Integration
      2. Definition of a Financial Crisis
      3. Types of Crises
      4. Domestic Issues in Crisis Avoidance and Policies for Crisis Management
      5. The Mexican Peso Crisis (1994), The Asian Crisis (1998), and the Global Crisis (2008)
    13. Regional Issues in the Global Economy

    Primary Faculty
    Trueman, Mark
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Education

  
  • EDUC 1010 - Paraprofessional Theory & Practice

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course and practicum is intended for students seeking to meet the standards of the No Child Left Behind Legislation and to introduce the student to the role and responsibilities of the paraprofessional in the K-12 setting. It may be used as a “first step” in a career ladder toward obtaining a paraprofessional certificate or teaching certification. Topics covered include human growth and development, learning principles, instructional strategies for reading, math, and writing, behavior management, professionalism and strategies for working with special needs students. The Practicum component (*24 hours of field work with a K-12 teacher) complements the classroom material while providing the student the opportunity to directly apply classroom theory in a K-12 educational environment. *Student responsible for acquiring fieldwork site. *Before attending a school to complete the Practicum, it is necessary to have a Family Independent Agency (FIA) background check and a criminal background check. The college instructor will provide appropriate forms.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will demonstrate the roles and responsibilities of teachers and paraprofessionals.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major roles and responsibilities of teachers and paraprofessionals.
    2. Identify the state and federal legislations that impact paraprofessionals.
    3. Observe roles and responsibilities during practicum.
    4. Document observation of roles and responsibilities.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to practice ethical and professional standards of conduct, including the requirements of confidentiality.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the ethical and professional standards of conduct.
    2. Review the Macomb Intermediate School District Performance Indicators for Paraprofessionals
    3. Observe the ethical and professional standards of conduct during practicum.
    4. Document observation of conduct.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to communicate with colleagues, follow instructions, and to use problem solving to work as a member of the instructional team; ability to provide positive behavioral support and management.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe basic techniques for establishing effective communication skills.
    2. Distinguish between vague and specific verbal instructions.
    3. Identify the steps for specifying behavior.
    4. Identify the guidelines for behavioral interventions.
    5. Observe communication, problem solving and behavioral strategies during the practicum.
    6. Document observation of communication, problem solving and behavioral strategies.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate awareness of diversity among children, youth, families, and colleagues with whom they work.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the major components of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act.
    2. Identify the major components of Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act.
    3. Identify the major components of Americans with Disabilities Act.
    4. Define inclusion.
    5. Define “Least Restrictive Environment”.
    6. Identify the purpose of an “Individualized Education Program” (IEP).
    7. Identify the major components of an Individual Education Program”.
    8. Identify members of an “Individualized Education Program Team”.
    9. Observe adaptive instruction and inclusion strategies during the practicum.
    10. Document observation of adaptive instruction and inclusion strategies in practicum log.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate knowledge and application of the elements of effective instruction to assist teaching and learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe principles of effective instruction.
    2. Identify strategies for learning.
    3. Describe task analysis.
    4. List the steps for preparing and presenting information.
    5. Describe the components of monitoring instruction.
    6. Observe effective instruction strategies during the practicum.
    7. Document observation of effective instruction strategies in practicum log.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1

    Course Expectations
    a. Assignments and Coursework
    b. Practicum

    2

    Roles and Responsibilities
    a. Paraprofessionals in the workplace
    b. General roles
    c. Specific responsibilities
    d. Delineating roles and responsibilities
    e. Carrying out responsibilities

    3

    a. Professional Standards
    b. Ethical Standards
    c. Practicing professional and ethical standards of conduct
    d. Effective Communication

    4

    Knowledge and Skills
    a. Characteristics of learners
    b. Assessment, diagnosis and development
    c. Instructional content and practice
    d. Supporting the teaching and learning environment

    5

    Assessment
    a. Group Work
    b. Test #1

    6, 7, 8

    Educating Students with Disabilities
    a. Five principles for educating students with disabilities
    b. Modification of instruction
    c. Strategies to ensure responsibilities are performed
    d. Individuals with Disabilities Act (IDEA)
    e. Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act
    f. Americans with Disabilities Act
    g. Least restrictive environment
    h. Accommodating students in regular classrooms
    i. Individualized Education Programs (IEP)

    9

    Assessment
    a. Group Work
    b. Test #2

    10

    Supporting Students in Reading/Comprehension
    a. Reading as a process
    b. Delivery of reading instruction
    c. Review Michigan’s standards for reading
    d. Strategies for supporting reading comprehension

    11

    Supporting Students in Writing
    a. Writing as a process
    b. Identification of writing process steps
    c. Strategies for supporting writing
    d. Review Michigan’s standards for writing

    12

    Supporting Students in Math
    a. Review age appropriate math concepts
    b. Review Michigan’s standards for math
    c. Review best practices based on research
    d. Strategies for supporting math concepts and skills

    13

    Assessment
    a. Group Work
    b. Test #3

    14 Group Presentations
    15 Group Presentations
    16 Final Grades

    Primary Faculty
    Boni, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Alward, Brenda
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EDUC 2010 - Introduction to Education

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210 

    An introductory course designed to provide prospective education majors with the opportunity to explore the teaching profession. Course content focuses on the foundations of education including the overview of the history and philosophy of education, school governance and finance, best practices in learning theories and instruction strategies, as well as exploration of current issues and trends. This course also provides an overview of unique teaching opportunities, university transfer requirements, and the Michigan requirements for teacher certification. Students will complete 30 hours of field observation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 5.875

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to identify their strengths and weaknesses as future classroom teachers.

    Objectives: Students will

    1. Identify what research states about effective teachers.
    2. Explain the behaviors and personalities of effective teachers.
    3. Reflect on their strengths and weaknesses in relationship to the characteristics of effective teachers.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to demonstrate the organization and planning needed to develop a lesson plan.

    Objectives: Students will

    1. Construct a lesson plan.
    2. Incorporate the “Instructional Cycle” into class activities.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of a variety of philosophies of education, major laws, school governance and finance structures that affect schools and teachers.

    Objectives: Students will

    1. Explain the purpose and components of a philosophy of education.
    2. Recognize, recall, interpret, and analyze a variety of philosophies of education.
    3. Write their personal philosophy of education.
    4. Recognize, recall, interpret, and analyze the major laws that affect teaching.
    5. Recognize, recall, interpret, and analyze school governing structures.
    6. Recognize, recall, interpret, and analyze school finance structures.
    7. Attend and evaluate a school board meeting.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of current global and societal issues that affect education.

    Objectives: Students will

    1. Research and identify current issues in education.
    2. Prepare and present an organized and researched oral group presentation on an issue that affects education.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to identify the best practices of effective teachers, teaching and learning styles, and the learning needs of a diverse population.

    Objectives: Students will

    1. Identify best practices of effective teachers.
    2. Identify and reflect on teaching and learning strategies.
    3. Identify the learning needs of a diverse population.
    4. Describe ways to assist the learning needs of a diverse population.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to explain their level of interest and commitment to becoming a teacher.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Report on their interest in teaching based on classroom observation, class discussion, readings, and journal writing.
    2. Write a plan of work, outlining the steps needed to complete an Associate Degree, Bachelor Degree, and obtain a Michigan Teaching Certificate.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to recognize appropriate professional behavior during the field experience.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Identify and follow school rules.
    2. Identify and follow professional demeanor.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of EDUC-2010, students will be able to observe the role and responsibilities of the teacher within the school.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Observe and describe the teacher’s daily routine.
    2. Observe and describe the teacher’s interactions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1, 2 Teaching as a Profession
    3 History of Education
    4 Philosophies of Education
    5 Laws Surrounding Education
    6 Students
    7, 8 Technology and Trends in Education
    9 Creating a Classroom Community
    10, 11 Teaching and Learning
    12 Developing as a Professional
    13, 14, 15 Teaching Presentations and Critique
    16 Wrap Up

     


    Primary Faculty
    Alward, Brenda Lee
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Electro‑Mechanical

  
  • ATEM 1350 - Electrical-Mechanical Blueprint Reading

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Practice in print reading using large blueprints for process control for temperature, flow, pressure, etc., delta-y connections, application of SCR controls, relay circuit for automated conveyor systems, robot operated hoist systems using programmable controllers, application of hydraulic, pneumatic and combustion controls, plumbing layout, power wiring layout, plant layout and interconnecting wiring.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the layout of an elementary wiring diagram.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the components used in elementary wiring diagram.
    2. Describe the various electrical symbols as applied to wiring diagrams.
    3. Describe the difference between an elementary wiring diagram, a pictorial diagram and an interconnecting diagram.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to modify and troubleshoot a machine using electrical diagrams.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe how a programmable controller interfaces with a machine.
    2. Describe how transformers are wired in for different voltage levels.
    3. Describe the application of electronic controls used in electrical circuits.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Electrical Symbols and Line Diagrams
    2. Logic Applied to Line Diagrams
    3. AC Manual Contractors and Motor Starters
    4. AC/DC Contractors and Motor Starters
    5. Time Delay and Logic
    6. Control Devices
    7. Reversing Motor Circuits
    8. Power Distribution Systems
    9. Solid State Electronic Control Devices
    10. Electromechanical and Solid State Relays
    11. Programmable Controllers

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Electronic Technology

  
  • ELEC 1100 - Introduction to Electronics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly EETE 1100)

    ELEC 1100 is designed for non-ELEC majors who lack a formal training experience in the following areas: series, parallel, series-parallel and basic A.C. circuits. Students will use basic algebra, scientific calculators and an electronic software program in this class.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with electronic terminology and coding of components.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the properties of a conductor, semiconductor, and insulator based on the Bohr model of an atom.
    2. Determine the color-coded value of a 5%, 10%, and 20% tolerance resistor, using the EIA color code.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate voltage, currents and resistance for different circuits.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the use of a DVOM on the voltage, current and resistance ranges given the proper equipment and components.
    2. Calculate voltages, current, resistances and powers for a series circuit.
    3. Calculate voltage, currents, resistances and powers for a parallel circuit.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week Topic Assignment

    1. Introduction
      1. Read: Chapter 1
      2. Lecture: Chapter 1
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test from Chapter 1
      4. Lab: Experiment 3
    2. Selected topics from Chapter 2 and Experiment3
    3. Read: Chapter 3
      1. Lecture: Chapter 3
      2. Review: Homework from Chapter 1
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test from Chapter 3
      4. Lab: Experiment 3
    4. Electronics Workbench
    5. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Review: Homework from Chapter 3
      3. Homework: None
      4. Lab: Experiment 4
    6. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Homework: Worksheet
      3. Lab: Experiment 4
    7. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Review: Homework from worksheet
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test questions and even problems from Chapter 4
      4. Lab: Experiment 5
    8. Read: None
      1. Lecture: None
      2. Homework: None
      3. Lab: Experiment 6
    9. Read: None
      1. Lecture: None
      2. Homework: None
      3. Lab: Experiment 7
      4. Exam 1
    10. Read: None
      1. Lecture: Soldering
      2. Homework: Soldering
      3. Lab: Soldering and Experiment 8
    11. Read: Chapter 5
      1. Lecture: Chapter 5
      2. Homework: Multiple choice test questions and even problems from Chapter 5
      3. Lab: Experiment 9
    12. Lecture: Alternating Current
      1. Review: Homework chapter 5
      2. Lab: Oscilloscope
    13. Lecture: Capacitors and Diodes
      1. Lab: Oscilloscope
    14. Lecture: Rectifier Circuits
      1. Lab: Rectifier Circuits
    15. Lecture: Review
      1. Lab: Rectifier Circuits
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1111 - Electrical Fundamentals for Non-Electrical Tradesmen

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ATEE 1110)

    ELEC 1111 is designed for non-electrical apprentices. Topics include atomic structure; Ohm’s Law; series and parallel A.C. circuits; magnetism and induction; D.C. motors and generators; D.C. meters; A.C. fundamentals; capacitance; inductance; alternators; A.C. motors; A.C. meters.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the relationship between voltage, current and resistance.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply Ohm’s Law in calculating an unknown circuit quantity.
    2. Apply Watt’s Law in calculating circuit parameters.
    3. Identify a series and parallel circuit and calculate circuit parameters.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the relationship between induction and magnetism.

    Objectives:

    1. State the laws of magnetic attraction and repulsion.
    2. Explain the factors determining the strength of an electromagnet.
    3. Identify the parts of an A.C. and D.C. motor.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of meters.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize a volt meter.
    2. Determine the amount of amperage flowing in a circuit using an amp meter.
    3. Describe the function of a watt meter.
    4. Measure resistance using an ohm meter.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Learning/Applying Fundamentals
    2. Sources of Electricity
    3. Conductors and Insulators
    4. Resistors and Capacitors
    5. Ohm’s Law
    6. Series circuits
    7. Parallel circuits
    8. Series Parallel Circuits
    9. Meters
    10. AC Voltage
    11. Electromagnetic Induction
    12. Motors
    13. Relays and Switches

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1141 - Basic Electronics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course introduces basic electronic concepts such as electronic components, fundamental circuit laws and applications, AC/DC circuit types, and motors. Computer simulation software will be used to operate circuits. Industrial technical terms and safety procedures will be taught.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to solve electrical circuits.

    Objectives: 

    1. Describe electrical safety.
    2. Identify electrical components.
    3. Describe electrical units.
    4. Identify electrical connections.
    5. Describe instruments used to measure circuits.
    6. Describe the functions of voltage, current, resistance and power and give an application of each.
    7. Identify resistor color codes.
    8. Calculate problems using the fundamental circuit laws.
    9. Identify different types of circuits.
    10. Solve circuits.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to explain the different types of power supplies.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of power supplies.
    2. Describe the function of batteries.
    3. Describe the function of transformers.
    4. Select correct wire/conductor sizes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to compare the differences between Alternating Current (AC) and Direct Current (DC).

    Objectives:

    1. Describe Direct Current circuits.
    2. Describe Alternating Current circuits.
    3. Describe AC and DC circuits using simulation software.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to explain electrical control systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify components used in control logic.
    2. Describe the function of control relay logic circuits.
    3. Describe the function PLC ladder logic.
    4. Describe ladder logic.
    5. Give an example of ladder logic.
    6. Describe the six elements of control logic.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to solve basic motor circuits.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe motor operation.
    2. Identify motor types and controls.
    3. Describe motor starting and stopping.
    4. Calculate motor power and torque.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to explain electrical sensors.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the types of basic sensors.
    2. Describe the types of electrical sensors.
    3. Give examples of sensor applications.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Components, Quantities and Units.
      1. Electrical components and measuring instruments.
      2. Electrical units.
      3. Engineering notation and metric prefixes.
      4. Metric unit conversions.
      5. Circuit connectors.
      6. Electrical Safety
    2. Voltage, Current and Resistance.
      1. Atomic structure.
      2. Electrical charge.
      3. Voltage, Current and Resistance.
      4. Basic circuit measurements.
      5. Conductors, semiconductors and Insulators
    3. Ohm’s law, energy and power.
      1. Ohm’s law.
      2. Application of ohm’s law.
      3. Energy and Watt’s Law
      4. Power in electronic circuits.
      5. The power rating of resistors.
      6. Energy conversion and voltage drops across a resistor.
      7. Power supplies.
      8. Circuit ground.
    4. Series circuits.
      1. Resistors in series.
      2. Current in a series circuit.
      3. Total series resistance.
      4. Ohm’s law applied to series circuits.
      5. Voltage sources in series.
      6. Voltage dividers.
      7. Power in a series circuit.
      8. Troubleshooting series circuits.
    5. Parallel circuits.
      1. Resistance and voltage in parallel circuits.
      2. Kirchhoff’s current law.
      3. Total parallel equivalent resistance.
      4. Ohm’s law applied to parallel circuits.
      5. Current dividers.
      6. Power in parallel circuits.
      7. Troubleshooting parallel circuits.
    6. Series-Parallel circuits.
      1. Identifying series-parallel relationships.
      2. Analysis of series-parallel circuits.
      3. Voltage dividers with resistive loads.
      4. Loading effect of meters.
      5. Troubleshooting series-parallel circuits.
    7. Control Logic.
      1. Logic Elements (AND, OR)
      2. Logic Elements (NOT, NOR, NAND)
      3. Ladder Diagrams
      4. Electro-Pneumatic Solenoid Valves
      5. Relay Operation
      6. Relay Applications
      7. Limit Switch Operation
      8. Limit Switch Applications
    8. Motors.
      1. Motor Principal
      2. Motor Types
      3. Motor Starting and Stopping
      4. Motor Power and Torque
    9. Sensors
      1. Introduction to Electronic Sensors
      2. Inductive Sensor
      3. Capacitive Sensor
      4. Magnetic Reed Sensors
      5. Hall Effect Sensors
      6. Photoelectric Sensors
      7. Sensor Applications

    Primary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Secondary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1151 - Test Equipment & Troubleshooting

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course is designed to introduce students to the following areas: Soldering, Materials, AAQ quality standards, NCCER electrical codes, test equipment usage, wire and cable terminations, overview of cable selections in electrical drawings, and basic troubleshooting of simple electrical circuits. It is an introductory course with hands-on engagement utilizing simulator learning system. This course will apply a computer simulation software to emphasize the application of troubleshooting of electrical problems and signal tracing. 

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to troubleshoot mechatronic systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify common types of repairs.
    2. Troubleshoot systems to the component level.

     
    Outcome 2:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform industry standard wiring repairs.

    Objectives:

    1. Solder connections as referenced in AAQ and NCCER guidelines.
    2. Describe lead-free solder and tin whiskers.
    3. Identify soldering materials.
    4. Describe mechatronics standard connection/termination schema.
    5. Inspect wire connections.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize test equipment used in mechatronic systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Select correct test equipment.
    2. Utilize correct test equipment to troubleshoot.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    I. Overview of AMATROL, Soldering, Connectors and Terminations

    1. Introduction of course objectives. Overview of AMATROL workstations and methodology.
      1. Explain the purpose of OSHA and NFPA 70E and how they promote safety on the job
      2. Recognize electrical/energy hazards and describe how to avoid of minimize them in workplace
      3. Explain safety issues concerning lockout/tagout procedures, personal protection utilizing assured grounding and isolation programs, confined space entry, respiratory protection, and fall protection
    2. General Soldering Information 
      1. Lab I
    3. Quality Assurance and Cleanliness
      1. Lab II
    4. Pb-Free Solder and Tin Whiskers
      1. Lab III
    5. Connector Training wrap-up
      1. Lab IV - Terminals 
      2. Lab V - Crimps

    II. Test Equipment

    1. Describe and explain operation of the following pieces of test equipment:
      1. Ammeter, Voltmeter, Ohmmeter, Multimeter, Continuity tester, Electrical outlet tester, Oscilloscope, Frequency counter, Signal generator, Power factor meter, Thermal tester
    2. Performance tasks:
    3. Lab VI - measure AC/DC voltage current, and resistance using a multimeter
    4. Lab VII - set up and use selected cable testers to check out cables and evaluate the performance of copper and fiber optic cable.
    5. Additional Performance tasks:
    6. Lab VIII - measure waveform utilizing Oscilloscope, signal generator
    7. Lab IX- measure signal with Digital meter

    III. Test Equipment - Summary

    1. Troubleshooting outlook:
      1. Explain the difference between maintenance and repair.
      2. Identify the common causes of system and equipment failures.
      3. Using electrostatic discharge (ESD) control devices and techniques when handling ESD-sensitive equipment and components.
      4. Use manufacturers’ troubleshooting aids to identify system problem(s).

    IV. Troubleshooting

    1. Identify and explain preventive maintenance and inspection schedules.
    2. Identify common preventive maintenance measures
    3. Isolate common faults in wiring and equipment (AMATROL Troubleshooting LAP 1)
      1. Determine if a power supply is good or bad
      2. Isolate common faults in copper and fiber optic cable wired networks 
      3. Determine if a printed circuit board is good or bad
      4. Acronym - Industry Abbreviation List + References Standards (AMATROL Troubleshooting LAP 2)

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1161 - Electronic Technology 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly EETE 1160)

    This course is intended for those students seeking entry-level knowledge in electronic technology. This course will provide the student with theory and practical experimentation in the following areas as applied to D.C. circuits: Series, Parallel, and Series-Parallel circuits. Meters will be used to measure and evaluate signals and operating voltages. Identification of basic electronic components as they relate to actual and schematic symbols. Ohm’s Law, Watt’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Laws, and the Superposition Theorem will be employed. An electronic software program will be applied to various circuits in class. Scientific calculators and basic algebra will be used in class.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a series circuit using Electronic Workbench

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s voltage laws will be developed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a parallel circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current laws will be used.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series-parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws will be used.

    Objectives:

    1. Components, Quantities and Units
      1. Recognize common electrical components and measuring instruments
      2. State basic electrical and magnetic quantities and units
      3. Use scientific notation to express quantities
      4. Use engineering notation and metric prefixes to express large and small quantities
      5. Convert from one metric prefixed unit to another
    2. Voltage, Current and Resistance
      1. Describe the basic structure of the atom
      2. Explain the concept of electrical charge
      3. Define voltage, current and resistance and explain their characteristics
      4. Describe a basic electrical circuit
      5. Make basic circuit measurements
      6. Recognize electrical hazards and practice proper safety procedures
    3. Ohm’s law, energy and power
      1. Explain Ohm’s law
      2. Use Ohm’s law to determine voltage, current, or resistance
      3. Define energy and power
      4. Calculate power in an electronic circuit
      5. Properly select resistors based on power rating
      6. Explain energy conversion and voltage drops
      7. Discuss power supplies and their characteristics
      8. Describe a basic approach to troubleshooting
    4. Series circuits
      1. Identify a series circuit
      2. Determine the current in a series circuit
      3. Determine total series resistance
      4. Apply ohm’s law to series circuits
      5. Determine the total effect of voltage sources in series
      6. Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage law
      7. Use a series circuit as a voltage divider
      8. Determine power in a series circuit
      9. Determine and identify ground in a series circuit
      10. Measure voltages relative to circuit ground
      11. Troubleshoot series circuits
    5. Parallel circuits
      1. Identify a parallel circuit
      2. Determine the voltage across each parallel branch
      3. Apply Kirchhoff’s current law
      4. Determine total parallel equivalent resistance
      5. Apply ohm’s law in a parallel circuit
      6. Use a parallel circuit as a current divider
      7. Determine power in a parallel circuit
      8. Troubleshoot parallel circuits
    6. Series-Parallel circuits
      1. Identify series-parallel relationships
      2. Analyze series-parallel circuits
      3. Analyze loaded voltage dividers
      4. Determine the loading effect of a voltmeter on a circuit
      5. Analyze a Wheatstone bridge circuit
      6. Apply superposition theorem to circuit analysis
      7. Troubleshoot series-parallel circuits

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Components, Quantities and Units
      1. Electrical components and measuring instruments
      2. Electrical and magnetic units
      3. Scientific notation
      4. Engineering notation and metric prefixes
      5. Metric unit conversions
    2. Voltage, Current and Resistance
      1. Atomic structure
      2. Electrical charge
      3. Voltage, current, and resistance
      4. Basic circuit measurements
      5. Electrical safety
    3. Ohm’s law, energy and power
      1. Ohm’s law
      2. Application of Ohm’s law
      3. Energy and power
      4. Power in electronic circuits
      5. The power rating of resistors
      6. Energy conversion and voltage drops across a resistor
      7. Power supplies
      8. Introduction to troubleshooting
    4. Series circuits
      1. Resistors in series
      2. Current in a series circuit
      3. Total series resistance
      4. Ohm’s law applied to series circuits
      5. Voltage sources in series
      6. Kirchhoff’s voltage law
      7. Voltage dividers
      8. Power in a series circuit
      9. Circuit ground
      10. Troubleshooting series circuits
    5. Parallel circuits
      1. Resistance and voltage in parallel circuits
      2. Kirchhoff’s current law
      3. Total parallel equivalent resistance
      4. Ohm’s law applied to parallel circuits
      5. Current dividers
      6. Power in parallel circuits
      7. Troubleshooting parallel circuits
    6. Series-Parallel circuits
      1. Identifying series-parallel relationships
      2. Analysis of series-parallel circuits
      3. Voltage dividers with resistive loads
      4. Loading effect of meters
      5. The Wheatstone Bridge
      6. Superposition theorem
      7. Troubleshooting series-parallel circuits

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1171 - Electronic Technology 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1161  

    (formerly EETE 1170)

    This course is a continuation for students seeking entry-level knowledge in electronic technology. This course will provide theory and experimentation in the following areas as applied to A.C. circuits: alternators, sine waves, capacitance, inductance, RC, RL and RCL series and parallel circuits, phase shift and filter, phase lead and lag circuits. Experimentation will include the use of meters, the oscilloscope, and the function generator.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a series circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s voltage laws will be developed.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a parallel circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current laws will be used.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series-parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws will be used.

    Objectives

    1. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
      1. Explain the principles of the magnetic field
      2. Explain the principles of electromagnetism
      3. Describe the operation of various types of electromagnetic devices
      4. Explain magnetic hysteresis
      5. Discuss the principle of electromagnetic induction
      6. Describe various applications of magnetic induction
    2. Introduction to alternating current and voltage
      1. Identify a sinusoidal waveform and measure its characteristics
      2. Describe how sine waves are generated
      3. Determine the voltage and current values of sine waves
      4. Describe angular relationships of sine waves
      5. Mathematically analyze a sinusoidal waveform
      6. Apply basic circuit analysis to AC resistive circuits
      7. Determine total voltages that have both AC and DC components
      8. Identify the characteristics of basic non-sinusoidal waveforms
      9. Use an oscilloscope to measure waveforms
    3. Capacitors
      1. Describe the basic structure and characteristics of a capacitor
      2. Discuss various types of capacitors
      3. Analyze series and parallel connected capacitors
      4. Describe how a capacitor operates in a DC switching circuit
      5. Describe how a capacitor operates in an AC circuit
      6. Discuss various capacitor applications
      7. Test a capacitor
    4. RC (Resistor-Capacitor) circuits
      1. Describe the relationship between current and voltage in an RC circuit
      2. Determine impedance and phase angle in a series or parallel RC circuit
      3. Analyze a series or parallel RC circuit
      4. Analyze series-parallel RC circuits
      5. Determine power in an RC circuit
      6. Discuss basic RC circuit applications
      7. Troubleshoot RC circuits
    5. Inductors
      1. Describe the basic structure and characteristics of an inductor
      2. Discuss various types of inductors
      3. Analyze series and parallel connected inductors
      4. Describe how an inductor operates in a DC switching circuit
      5. Describe how an inductor operates in an AC circuit
      6. Discuss various inductor applications
      7. Test a capacitor
    6. RLC circuits and resonance
      1. Determine the impedance and phase angle of a series RLC circuit
      2. Analyze series and parallel RLC circuits
      3. Analyze a circuit for series or parallel resonance
      4. Analyze the operation of series or parallel resonant filters
      5. Discuss various system applications of resonant circuits
    7. Transformers
      1. Explain mutual inductance
      2. Describe how a transformer is constructed and how it works
      3. Explain how Step-Up and Step-Down transformers work
      4. Discuss the effect of a resistive load across the secondary winding
      5. Discuss the concept of reflected load in a transformer
      6. Discuss impedance matching with transformers
      7. Explain how transformers act as an isolation device
      8. Describe various types of transformers
      9. Troubleshoot circuits which use transformers

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
      1. The magnetic field
      2. Electromagnetism
      3. Electromagnetic devices
      4. Magnetic hysteresis
      5. Electromagnetic induction
      6. Applications of electromagnetic induction
    2. Introduction to alternating current and voltage
      1. The sine wave
      2. Sinusoidal voltage sources
      3. Voltage and current values of sine waves
      4. Phase shift and angular measurement of sine waves
      5. Sine wave formulas
      6. Ohm’s law and Kirchoff’s law in AC circuits
      7. Superimposed DC and AC voltages
      8. Non-sinusoidal waveforms
      9. The oscilloscope
    3. Capacitors
      1. Types of capacitors
      2. Series and parallel capacitors
      3. Capacitors in DC and AC circuits
      4. Capacitor applications
      5. Testing capacitors
    4. RC (Resistor-Capacitor) circuits
      1. Sinusoidal response of RC circuits
      2. Impedance and phase angle of series and parallel RC circuits
      3. Analysis of series and parallel RC circuits
      4. Series-Parallel RC circuits
      5. Power in RC circuits
      6. Basic applications of RC circuits
      7. Troubleshooting RC circuits
    5. Inductors
      1. Types of inductors
      2. Series and parallel inductors
      3. Inductors in DC and AC circuits
      4. Inductor applications
      5. Testing inductors
    6. RLC circuits and resonance
      1. Impedance and phase angle of series RLC circuits
      2. Analysis of series RLC circuits
      3. Series and parallel resonance
      4. Series and parallel resonant filters
      5. RLC circuit applications
    7. Transformers
      1. Mutual inductance
      2. The basic transformer
      3. Step-Up and Step-Down transformers
      4. Loading the secondary
      5. Reflected load
      6. Matching source and load resistance
      7. Isolation transformers
      8. Other types of transformers
      9. Troubleshooting transformers

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1182 - Semiconductor Theory & Devices

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1171 

    (formerly ELEC 1181)

    ELEC 1182 provides students with the knowledge required to understand and troubleshoot electronic circuits containing diodes, transistors, FETs, and MOSFETs. Among the topics discussed are Thevenin’s Theorem, semiconductor theory, half-wave and full-wave rectifiers, transistor biasing circuits, FET and MOSFET biasing. Students will learn through lecture, textbook assignments, hands-on laboratory experimentation, and simulated virtual experiments utilizing computer software.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will be able to analyze electronic circuits utilizing Thevenin’s Theorem.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an electronic schematic of a series circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.
    2. Given an electronic schematic of a parallel circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.
    3. Given an electronic schematic of a series-parallel circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will be able to apply knowledge of semiconductor physics toward the analysis and evaluation of electronic circuits containing semiconductor devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply knowledge of the basic structure of semiconductor materials toward the analysis of semiconductor circuits.
    2. Demonstrate biasing of a PN junction.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain diodes.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of:
      1. Half wave and full wave rectifiers.
      2. Rectifier circuits which utilize electronic filtering.
      3. Diode limiters and clampers.
      4. Zener diodes
      5. Varactor diodes.
      6. Light emitting diodes and photo diodes.
    2. Interpret diode data sheets and apply that data to the analysis of circuitry.
    3. Troubleshoot and repair faults in power supplies and diode circuits.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronics circuits which contain transistors.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of:
      1. Bipolar transistor biasing circuits.
      2. Bipolar transistor switching circuits.
      3. Junction Field Effect Transistor biasing circuits.
      4. Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor biasing circuits.
    2. Identify for specific purposes BJT, FET, and MOSFET package configurations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Thevenin’s Theorem
      1. Series circuits
      2. Parallel circuits
      3. Series-parallel circuits
    2. Introduction to Semiconductors
      1. Atomic structure
      2. Hole flow and electron flow
      3. N-type and P-type
      4. PN junctions
      5. Diode characteristics
    3. Diode Applications
      1. Half wave rectifiers
      2. Full wave rectifiers
      3. Filters and regulators
      4. Limiting and clamping circuits
      5. Special purpose diodes
        1. zener diodes
        2. varactor diodes
        3. Light Emitting Diodes
        4. Photodiodes
      6. Diode data sheets
      7. Troubleshooting diode circuits
    4. Transistors
      1. Bipolar Junction Transistors
      2. Junction Field Effect Transistors
      3. Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors
      4. Biasing transistors
      5. Transistor packaging and terminal identification

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1192 - Semiconductor Devices & Circuits

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1182 

    (formerly EETE 2280)

    This course provides students with theory and practical experimentation using the following electronic devices: BJT, SCR, UJT, PUT, Triac, Diac, Four Layer Diode, SUS, SBS, Op-amps, and optoelectronic devices. Circuit designs include amplitude control, phase shift control, relaxation oscillators inverting, and non-inverting amplifiers.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to demonstrate the operation and perform basic measurements is a single stage BJT amplifier.

    Objectives:
    The students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate a single stage BJT amplifier.
    2. Measure and compare the output and input signals in order to verify the gain of a single stage BJT amplifier.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain thyristor devices.

    Objectives:
    The students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits containing:
      1. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers
      2. Triacs
      3. Silicon Bilateral and Silicon Unilateral switches
      4. Diacs and Four Layer Diodes

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain Unijunction Transistors.

    Objectives:
    Students will be able to:

    1. Construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits which perform the following functions:
      1. Timer operations utilizing UJT’s
      2. Relaxation Oscillators utilizing UJT’s
      3. SCR control utilizing UJT’s

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain operational amplifiers

    Objectives:
    Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate the operation of inverting amplifiers.
    2. Construct and evaluate the operation of non-inverting amplifiers.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Voltage Amplifiers
      1. Coupling and Bypass capacitors
      2. Base-Emitter resistance r’e
      3. The D.C equivalent circuit
      4. The A.C. equivalent circuit
      5. Deriving gain
    2. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers
      1. Two transistor model
      2. Device characteristics
      3. Amplitude control
      4. Firing delay and conduction angles
      5. Average load current and voltage
    3. Unijunction Transistors
      1. Resistor-diode model
      2. UJT characteristics
      3. Peak firing voltage
      4. Deriving values of Re(max) and Re(min)
      5. Relaxation oscillators
      6. UJT actuated SCR’s
      7. Programmable Unijunction Transistors (PUT’s)
    4. Triacs and other Thyristors
      1. Triac operational parameters
      2. Phase shift control
      3. Flash-on and soft start circuits
      4. Diac control
      5. SBS control
      6. Change in voltage over change in time (dv/dt)

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1211 - Digital Electronics Basics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1141  or ELEC 1171 

    (formerly EETE 1210)

    This course will provide students with the knowledge required to understand and troubleshoot digital electronic circuits. Among the topics discussed are number systems, codes, logic gates, Boolean statements, combinational logic, flip-flops, counters, shift registers, memory and storage, and integrated circuit technologies. Knowledge will be gained through lecture, textbook assignments, hands-on laboratory experiments, and simulated virtual experiments utilizing virtual circuit software.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify and describe introduction to digital concepts.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the difference between digital and analog quantities.
    2. Show how voltage levels are used to represent digital quantities.
    3. Discuss various parameters involving pulse waveforms.
    4. Explain the basic logic operations of NOT, AND, and OR.
    5. Identify integrated circuits according to complexity and packaging.
    6. Identify pin numbers on integrated circuit packages.
    7. Recognize how test instruments are used to troubleshoot digital circuitry.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and apply number systems, operations and codes.

    Objectives:

    1. Count in the binary numbering system.
    2. Convert between binary and hexadecimal.
    3. Express binary numbers in sign magnitude, 1 and 2’s complement.
    4. Convert between binary and decimal.
    5. Convert between decimal and BCD.
    6. Interpret ASCII code.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will identify and apply logic gates.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the operation of all basic logic gates.
    2. Describe the operation of XOR and ENOR logic.
    3. Understand timing diagrams.
    4. Make basic comparisons between TTL and CMOS gates.
    5. Troubleshoot logic gates.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will apply logic simplification.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand the basic rules of Boolean logic statements.
    2. Apply DeMorgans theorem to simple Boolean expressions.
    3. Convert truth tables to sum of products logic.
    4. Use a Karnaugh map to simplify logic statements containing no more than 4 variables.
    5. Utilize NAND and NOR gates to implement any logic.
    6. Troubleshoot combinational circuits containing NANDS and NORS.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will identify and apply flip-flops.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the difference between a latch and a flip-flop.
    2. Explain how various types of flip-flops differ in operation.
    3. Apply flip-flops in basic applications.
    4. Describe the difference between synchronous and asynchronous operation.
    5. Understand basic counter and shift register applications.
    6. Troubleshoot circuits containing flip-flops.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will calculate and apply integrated circuit (IC) technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine noise margins for various devices.
    2. Calculate power dissipation in IC’s.
    3. Explain how propagation delay affects operating speed.
    4. Use and interpret data sheets.
    5. Explain and determine fan-out for any device.
    6. Understand the difference between totem pole and open collector outputs.
    7. Describe the operation of tri-state devices.
    8. Properly terminate unused inputs.
    9. Handle CMOS devices properly without the risk of damage.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Digital Concepts
      1. Digital and analog quantities
      2. Binary values
      3. Basic logic operations
      4. Integrated circuits
      5. Test instruments
    2. Number Systems, Operations and Codes
      1. Conversion between numbering systems
      2. Binary arithmetic
      3. 1 and 2’s complement
      4. Signed binary numbers
      5. Hexadecimal numbering system
      6. BCD, ASCII and other codes
      7. Parity checking
    3. Logic Gates
      1. Basic logic gates
        1. Inverter
        2. AND and OR
        3. NAND and NOR
        4. XOR and XNOR
      2. Integrated logic circuits
      3. Troubleshooting logic circuits
    4. Logic Simplification
      1. DeMorgans’ theorem
      2. Boolean expressions and truth tables
      3. Karnaugh mapping
    5. Combinational Logic
      1. Basic combinational logic
      2. Universal property of NAND and NOR gates
      3. Timing diagrams
      4. Troubleshooting combinational logic
    6. Flip-Flops
      1. Flip-flop operating characteristics
      2. Flip-flop circuit applications
      3. Synchronous and asynchronous operation
      4. Shift registers and up-down counters
    7. Integrated circuit technologies
      1. Basic operational characteristics and parameters
      2. CMOS and TTL logic families
      3. Other logic families (PMOS, NMOS E2CMOS, etc.)

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1221 - Microcontrollers With Robotic Application

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1211  

    This course will provide students with the knowledge required to understand, program, and apply microcontrollers (pic chips) to robotic applications using the Basic Stamp. The first half of the class will be spent learning to program and interface simple circuitry using the Basic Stamp interface board. The second half of the class will be spent applying this knowledge to a mobile robot with onboard sensors. Among the topics discussed are pic chip programming, controlling inputs and outputs, motion and rotational control, digital displays, measurement of light, frequency and sound, controlling servo motors, robotic navigation, tactile sensing, light sensitive navigation, and robotic control with distance detection. Knowledge will be gained through lecture, textbook assignments, hands-on laboratory experiments, and project troubleshooting.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome I:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify microcontrollers.

    Objectives:

    1. Define microcontrollers.
    2. Discuss applications of microcontrollers.
    3. Familiarize with the Basic Stamp 2.
    4. Discuss advanced applications of the Basic Stamp.

    Outcome II:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify and apply input‐output control.

    Objectives:

    1. Control L.E.D.’s with the Basic Stamp.
    2. Monitor inputs with the Basic Stamp.
    3. Understand counting and repeating loops.

    Outcome III:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify and apply controlling motion.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand On/Off signals for motion control.
    2. Troubleshoot and test servo’s.
    3. Program servo position.
    4. Convert programmed position to motion.
    5. Control a servo with a potentiometer.

    Outcome IV:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify and apply sensing analog values.

    Objectives:

    1. Convert analog values to read on 7 segment display.
    2. Understand basic light sensing and measurement.
    3. Produce programmed sound.
    4. Produce musical notes, simple songs and ring tones.

    Outcome V:
    Upon completion of this course the student will apply interfacing and timing.

    Objectives:

    1. Program current control through a transistor.
    2. Understand subsystem integration.
    3. Build and test RC timing circuit for programmed control.
    4. Develop and add a software subsystem.

    Outcome VI:
    Upon completion of this course the student will apply and operate robot servo motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Track time and repeat actions.
    2. Interface servo motors.
    3. Center servo motors.
    4. Store servo values and count.
    5. Test servo motors.
    6. Understand servo transfer curves.

    Outcome VII: Upon completion of this course the student will apply and program robot navigation.

    Objectives:

    1. Program basic maneuvers.
    2. Calculate distances.
    3. Simplify navigation with subroutines.
    4. Build complex maneuvers in EEPROM.
    5. Navigate with whiskers.
    6. Understand basic artificial intelligence.
    7. Navigate using visible light.
    8. Navigate using infrared.
    9. Test the frequency sweep.
    10. Follow a stripe.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Microcontrollers
      1. Use of microcontrollers
      2. Applications of microcontrollers
      3. Becoming familiar with the Basic Stamp 2
      4. Advanced applications of the Basic Stamp
      5. Programming ASCII characters
    2. Input‐Output Control
      1. Controlling L.E.D.’s with the Basic Stamp
      2. Building an testing an L.E.D. circuit
      3. On/Off control with the Basic Stamp
      4. Counting and repeating
      5. Using current direction to control a bi‐color L.E.D.
      6. Receiving vs. sending high and low signals
      7. Testing a pushbutton with an L.E.D. circuit
      8. Reading a pushbutton with the Basic Stamp
      9. Reaction timer test
    3. Controlling Motion
      1. Microcontrolled motion
      2. On/Off signals and motion control
      3. Connecting and testing the servo
      4. Computerized control of position
      5. Converting position to motion
      6. Pushbutton controlled servo
      7. Measuring resistance by measuring time
      8. Reading a dial with the Basic Stamp
      9. Controlling a servo with a potentiometer
    4. Sensing Analog Values
      1. Digital displays
      2. Building and te sting a 7 segment display
      3. Displaying the position of a dial
      4. Introduction to photo sensing
      5. Building and testing a light meter
      6. Graphing light measurements
      7. Tracking light events
      8. Building and testing a speaker circuit
      9. Producing action sounds
      10. Producing musical notes and simple songs
      11. Cell phone ring tones
    5. Interfacing and Timing
      1. Interfacing integrated circuits
      2. Controlling current flow through a transistor
      3. Building and testing pushbutton circuits
      4. Building and testing RC timing circuits
      5. Subsystem integration
      6. Developing a software subsystem
    6. Robot Servo Motors
      1. Tracking time and rep eating actions
      2. Connecting the servo motors
      3. Centering servo motors
      4. Storing servo values and count
      5. Testing the servo motors
      6. Start/Reset indicator circuit and program
      7. Servo transfer curves
    7. Robot Navigation
      1. Programming basic maneuvers
      2. Calculating distances
      3. Ramping
      4. Simplifying navigation with subroutines
      5. Building complex maneuvers in EEPROM
      6. Building and testing whiskers
      7. Navigation with whiskers
      8. Understanding basic artificial intelligence
      9. Roaming and avoiding shadows
      10. Following a beam of light
      11. Building and testing IR pairs
      12. Field testing for object detection
      13. Infrared detection range adjustments
      14. Object detection and avoidance
      15. High performance IR navigation
      16. Drop - off detection
      17. Determining distance
      18. Testing the frequency sweep
      19. Following a stripe

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Mielke, Michael
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1250 - Introduction to Audio & Video Technology

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course focuses on application of electronic concepts with components in audio and video technology. Also covered are mechanical hookups, connections and basic electronic troubleshooting, and servicing. The student will become familiar with basic electronic equipment used in an audio and video studio, and troubleshoot operational and connection problems.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to set up a simulated audio-video studio in a lab classroom studio for recording and playback.

    Objectives:

    1. Connect an audio and video classroom simulation.
    2. Connect an audio recording studio simulation.
    3. Inspect a studio setup for cabling errors.
    4. Use service information to identify input and output connections.
    5. Become familiar with various audio and video equipment manufacturers.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to operate a simulated audio-video studio in a lab environment for recording and playback.

    Objectives:

    1. Use service information to identify correct equipment operations.
    2. Become familiar with various audio and video equipment manufacturers.
    3. Make an audio recording.
    4. Make a video recording.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to inspect and troubleshoot cabling and equipment used in the studio environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Service defective cables.
    2. Troubleshoot an audio recording setup.
    3. Troubleshoot a video recording setup.
    4. Obtain the knowledge to locate operation and service information about audio and video equipment in the studio.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. The history and technological development of electronics applied to broadcasting TV, VCR, and DVD technology
      1. The nature of broadcast signals and the distinction between VHF and UHF Signals
      2. Lab
        1. An overview in the use of measuring/testing equipment such as oscilloscopes, meters, test tapes, etc.
        2. Cords & connectors, fuses, etc.
        3. Cable making (coaxial, “F”, XLR audio, and stereo ¼ in.)
    2. The nature and measurement of sound
      1. Sound waves
      2. Hearing sound
      3. Decibels of sound
      4. Decibels of power and voltage
      5. Use of the VU meter
      6. Use of the sound level meter
      7. Lab: Use of the Shure six-channel microphone mixer (Use handout instructions)
        1. Front panel, connectors, and controls
        2. Rear panel, connectors and controls
        3. Hook up a microphone to one of the six inputs
        4. Hook to microphone
        5. Plug in AC power
        6. Check out operation
        7. Head phone use
    3. Microphones
      1. Sensitivity
      2. Frequency response
      3. Pick up patterns
      4. Dispersion and use
      5. Elements and housings
      6. Lab: Cords and connectors
        1. Make a cable with two ¼-in. stereo solder on connectors (tip, ring, sleeve)
        2. Make a cable with two XLR audio solder on connectors
        3. Check out the cables with an ohm meter
        4. Hook up to the Shure M367 and check out the cables
    4. Speaker Systems
      1. Drivers
      2. Enclosures
      3. Electronic circuits
      4. Lab
        1. Speaker performance (different sizes in ohms)
        2. Troubleshooting cables and connectors. See Ch. no. 14 & 15 text
    5. Magnetic tape systems
      1. Magnetic tape (overview)
      2. Drive systems
      3. Control systems
      4. Magnetic tape heads
      5. Record and play back
      6. Lab
        1. Maintenance procedures
          1. Cleaning, demagnetizing, tape splicing, cassettes and cartridges
        2. Set up a VCR with a monitor, record, and play back a test tape
        3. Instructor’s demonstration on how to remove a stuck tape
          1. Manual
          2. With a 9V battery
          3. Go over the cassette construction
        4. Troubleshooting
    6. MX-4 Multiple-Source Video Production
      1. Understanding the MX-4 connectors
      2. Lab: Note the cables associated with each connector on the MX-4 rear panel
        1. Power-AC power to an electrical outlet
        2. Video in Y/C- Connect S- video sources
        3. Video in - connect composite sources
        4. Audio - Connect audio devices to these connectors. Each set has a (left) and a (right) for stereo
        5. HB In - Connect a composite source such as a camera to lock on to and synchronize the MX-4 with it
        6. GPI Control- Connect a general purpose interface (GPI) device to this jack to control the MX-4 from an external device. There are a total of ten output connectors, one preview, two composite, two S-video, four audio, and a headphone jack.
        7. Preview out - Connect a composite video monitor to this jack. You cannot use an S-video monitor as preview. This monitor serves as your usual ” interface” with the MX-4. It’s where you do your most work.
        8. Y/C out - Connect an S-video output device, You record productions on this device, use it to display a live broadcast signal or both.
        9. OUT - Connect a composite output device, same as above, but use this connector if your output device is composite format.
        10. AUDIO OUT - Connect a suitable audio cable from these jacks to the audio inputs on your output device.
        11. HEADPHONES - Refer to using headphones
        12. Use handouts for the MX-4
    7. Video
      1. Monitors
      2. Cameras
      3. Lab
        1. Cables & Power supply
        2. Use in the lab camcorder and cameras as used in the lab
        3. How to turn a TV into a monitor
    8. The concept of broadcast TV signal
      1. The UHF, VHF, and cable signals
      2. Lab
        1. The function of various adapters in properly completing basic TV/VCR hookups
        2. Discuss and view rear panel of the VCR
        3. Install adaptors such as the R.F switch, signal splitting, etc.
        4. Hook up handouts 1, 2, and 3
    9. Review video system component identification of, resistor, diode, and transistor identification
      1. Component functions
      2. Digital multimeter review
      3. Hand outs
      4. Lab
        1. Digital multimeter function and tests of fuses, resistors, transistors, diodes, and cables
    10. Introduction to black and white TV
      1. Picture transmission
      2. Scanning lines
      3. Raster formation
      4. The vidicon TV camera tube
      5. A TV picture tube
      6. Show a VCR tape
      7. Lab
        1. Hook up the SR-VS300 Min DV/S - VHS recorder
        2. Hook it up to a monitor
        3. Play a test tape with the VCR
        4. Record a test signal on the mini DVD
    11. Review the composite video signal, explain the RF wave form and amplitude. Explain:
      1. The modulated composite video signal
      2. The complete VHF and UHF frequency spectrum for each channel
      3. The CATV converter (cable box)
      4. The frequency system spectrum for CATV systems
      5. Lab
        1. Hook up the antenna and balum to a bench TV
        2. Use 300 ohm and coax 75 ohm cables
        3. Adapt BNC to “F” connectors
        4. Hook up a VCR to a monitor (Play a test tape)
        5. Hook up a DVD to a monitor
        6. Test D&E with the color bars from the test bench
        7. Show the composite video signal on an “O” scope
    12. Common uses for the MX-4. You can connect one of the following
      1. VCRs
      2. Camcorders
      3. Video disc players
      4. Cameras
      5. Live video - Multiple input and output sources
        1. Source - A source is an input device, Each source provides a video signal, audio signal, or both. You use the MX-4 to combine the signals.
        2. Output - An output device is a device on which you record and/or broadcast a signal. The signal might contain video, audio, or both. This signal is often a mix of signals coming from the MX-4.
        3. Preview monitor
        4. Program monitor
      6. Lab: Using the MX-4,
        1. Connect a composite - type monitor to MX-4’s preview out jack
        2. Connect an input source (such as a VCR or Camcorder) to the MX-4’s S-Video in 1 jack
        3. Connect a second input source to the MX-4’s S-Video in 2 jack
        4. Connect an output device to the out jacks on the MX-4’s rear panel. This is the device where you record the program.
        5. Connect a television or monitor to the recording VCR according to their instructions
        6. Connect the MX-4 power supply to the to the power supply jack on the rear panel
        7. Connect the MX-4 power cord to a suitable outlet
        8. Turn on all devices (The MX-4 power switch is located on the right end of the unit) and let the tapes roll
    13. Discuss the color bar generator
      1. The purpose of the color bar generator is to act as a substitute transmitter. As such it supplies to the receiver a known nonvaring color pattern that can be used for equipment adjustment and troubleshooting purposes. There are two types of color bar generators in use:
        1. The NTSC (National Television Systems Committee) generator
        2. The Gated Rainbow color bar generator
      2. Lab
        1. Hook up a VCR to the bench antenna with a color bar signal
        2. Make a test tape by recording all of the color bar signals
    14. The TV picture tubes and associated circuits
      1. Basic structures
      2. Glass envelope
      3. Essential features of a black and white and color picture tube
      4. World wide type designation systems
      5. The electron gun
      6. Phosphor screen and shadow mask
      7. Lab: Demonstrate color adjustment procedure (hand out)
        1. Hook up a color bar generator
        2. Degauss the picture tube (CRT)
        3. The instructor will demonstrate color alignment
    15. Field Trip to the video lab, MACA R-124
    16. Final exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1300 - Electric Theory-Electrical Equipment & Introduction to Machine Circuits

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ATEE 1300)

    After a brief introduction to the fundamentals of electricity, this course covers wire size, insulation, connections, and wiring methods. Topics also include switches, relays, motor starters, and other control components. ELEC 1300 also introduces machine tool control circuits, maintenance procedures, and safe working practices.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the type and usage of wire tables.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the type of insulation and conductor a wire is composed of.
    2. Properly use the wire tables to select a conductor.
    3. Identify wires used for motors.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify components in a ladder logic circuit.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and describe the operation of a grounded and an ungrounded circuit.
    2. Identify JIC symbols on an electrical schematic.
    3. Using NEC, properly select components for circuits.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the various types of conduits.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the various types of conduits.
    2. Properly use the conduit tables to select a conduit.
    3. Calculate conduit fill.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Fundamentals of Electricity
    2. Ohm’s Law, Watt’s Law, Series Circuits, Parallel Circuits
    3. Conductors, Allowable Ampacities
    4. Conduits and Fittings
    5. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
    6. AC, DC Single Phase Three Phase Power System
    7. Transformers
    8. Three Phase Systems
    9. Machining Controlling Devices
    10. Fuses, Circuit Breakers, Disconnects
    11. Motor Across the Line Starters
    12. Elementary Diagrams and Circuits

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1310 - Electrical-Basic Direct & Alternating Current Motor Control Circuits

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATAM 1350  or ELEC 1300 

    (formerly ATEE 1250)

    ELEC 1310 provides an introduction to D.C. and A.C. motor control circuits. Topics include fundamental concepts of electricity and magnetism, series and parallel circuits, D.C. motors and generators, basic electrical instruments, A.C. motors, and electric motor control symbols and circuits.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of AC motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the parts of an A.C. and D.C. motor
    2. Single phase motors
    3. Three phase motors

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of DC motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Series motors
    2. Shunt motor
    3. Complex motor

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Orientation - Single-Phase Motor and Introduction
    2. Motor Maintenance and Installation
    3. Basic Motor Control
    4. Controllers, Relays and Timers
    5. Three Phase Motors and Generators
    6. Three Phase Motors, controls and Full Voltage Starting
    7. Motor Acceleration and Deceleration
    8. Special Motors
    9. Power Distribution and Monitoring Systems
    10. D.C. Motors, Generators and Controls

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2005 - Discrete Amplifiers & Introduction to Op-Amps

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1192 

    (formerly EETE 1191)

    ELEC 2005 provides students theory and practical experimentation dealing with discrete transistor amplifiers and basic operational amplifier circuits. Among the circuits to be discussed are Voltage, Power, CC and CB amplifiers as well as inverting, non-inverting, differential, and summing op-amp amplifiers.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in transistor amplifier circuits.

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate a single stage BJT amplifier
    2. Construct and evaluate a multi-stage amplifier circuit
    3. Construct and evaluate Common Base and Common Collector Amplifiers
    4. Analyze and evaluate Power Amplifiers
    5. Analyze and evaluate Differential Amplifiers

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain Operational Amplifiers.

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate inverting and non-inverting amplifiers
    2. Demonstrate through lab the use of linear integrated circuits
    3. Evaluate the necessity of negative feedback in op-amp circuits

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in Linear Op-Amp Circuits

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits which perform the following op-amp functions:
      1. Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers
      2. Differential amplifiers
      3. Instrumentation amplifiers
      4. Summing amplifiers
    2. Students will analyze current boosters and voltage controlled current sources.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Voltage Amplifiers
      1. Voltage Gain
      2. Loading Effects
      3. Multistage Amplifiers
      4. Troubleshooting
    2. Common Collector and Common Base Amplifiers
      1. Common Collector Amplifier
      2. Input and Output Impedance
      3. Darlington Connections
      4. Voltage Regulation
      5. Common Base Amplifier
    3. Power Amplifiers
      1. AC and DC Load Lines
      2. Class A, B, and C amplifiers
    4. Differential Amplifiers
      1. DC Analysis
      2. AC Analysis
      3. Input Characteristics
      4. Common Mode Gain
    5. Operational Amplifiers (Op-Amps)
      1. 741 Op-Amp
      2. Inverting and Non-inverting Amplifiers
      3. Op-Amp Applications
      4. Linear Integrated Circuits
    6. Negative Feedback
      1. Voltage Controlled Voltage Source
      2. Current Controlled Voltage Source
      3. Voltage Controlled Current Source
      4. Current Controlled Current Source
      5. Bandwidth and Gain
    7. Linear Op-Amp Circuits
      1. Inverting and Non-Inverting Amplifiers
      2. Instrumentation Amplifiers
      3. Summing Amplifiers
      4. Single Supply Operation

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2010 - Instrumentation 1-Transducer Theory

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1211 

    (formerly EETE 2010)

    ELEC 2010 covers theory and application of the following devices and topics: Thevenin’s Theorem, operational amplifiers, passive and active filters, loading, oscilloscope operation and the following transducers: I.C. temperature, thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance sensor, strain gauge, LVDT and others. Students will use Electronics Workbench to simulate electronic circuits and instrumentation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will become familiar with devices such as amplifiers, filters, and oscilloscopes.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will acquire knowledge of transducers.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Demonstrate the use of an oscilloscope by measuring the inputs and the output of operational amplifier circuits, with an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to use software to simulate electronic circuits and instrumentation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Simplify electronic circuits using Thevenin’s Theorem, with an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Demonstrate the use of an oscilloscope by measuring the inputs and the output of operational amplifier circuits, with an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to simplify electronic circuits.

    Objectives:

    1. Simplify electronic circuits using Thevenin’s Theorem, with an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to simplify electronic circuits.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic Assignment

    1. Introduction
      Lecture: Thevenins Theorem and Loading
      Lab: Experiment 1
    2. Lecture: Oscilloscope and Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Experiment 2
    3. Lecture: Oscilloscope and Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Experiment 2
    4. Lecture: Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Operational Amplifiers
    5. Lecture: IC Temperature Transducer
      Lab: Experiments 2-1 and 2-2
    6. Lecture: The Thermistor
      Lab: Experiments 3-1 and 3-2
    7. Lecture: The RTD
      Lab: Experiments 4-1 and 4-2
    8. Finish all labs from weeks 1 - 7
    9. MID-TERM EXAM
    10. Lecture: The Thermocouple
      Lab: Experiments 5-1 and 5-2
    11. Lecture: The Capacitance Sensor
      Lab: Experiments 6-1
    12. Lecture: The Strain Gage
      Lab: Experiments 7-1 and 7-2
    13. Lecture: Ultrasonic Transducers
      Lab: Experiments 8-1 and 8-2
    14. Lecture: The Infrared Controller
      Lab: Experiments 9-1 and 9-2
    15. Finish all labs from weeks 10 -15
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jenneifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2150 - LabVIEW Basics 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1211  or approval of program advisor

    (formerly ELEC 2911)

    ELEC 2150 will provide an introduction to the LabVIEW graphical system design platform. Students create, edit, and execute programs that utilize basic LabVIEW functions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize features which will reconfigure the general physical and software layouts of the LabVIEW programming environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Define dataflow and what is meant by ‘Graphical Programming Language’.
    2. Describe and utilize the NI example finder.
    3. Describe what is meant by ‘data acquisition’.
    4. Describe the function of the ‘General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)’.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop and edit functional block diagrams and front panels.

    Objectives:

    1. Design and implement various front panel controls and indicators.
    2. Connect and manipulate nodes and wires in the block diagram.
    3. Demonstrate good LabVIEW project management techniques.
    4. Work with and manipulate SubVIs, along with their icons and connectors.
    5. Locate various toolbars and pull down menus for the purpose of implementing specific functions.
    6. Locate and utilize the context help window.
    7. Run a Virtual Instrument (VI).

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to load, save, and debug VIs.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute save and load dialogs.
    2. Demonstrate the use of the revert function.
    3. Troubleshoot broken VIs.
    4. Single-Step through a VI.
    5. Implement execution highlighting and setting break points.
    6. Create SubVIs
    7. Use sound practice to document LabVIEW projects.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to control program execution through structures such as ‘For-While’ loops and ‘Case Structures’.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute ‘For’ loops and ‘While’ loops.
    2. Utilize shift registers in conjunction with loops.
    3. Utilize ‘Case’ structures to control program execution.
    4. Use the ‘Select’ function for if-then-else scenarios.
    5. Implement ‘Timing’ functions.
    6. Input algebraic formulas via ‘Formula Nodes’ and ‘Expression Nodes’.
    7. Combine ‘While Loops’ with ‘Case Structure’.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize composite data in the form of Arrays and Clusters.

    Objectives:

    1. Create Array controls and indicators.
    2. Use ‘Auto-Indexing’.
    3. Create Cluster controls and indicators.
    4. Interchange arrays and clusters.
    5. Utilize Error Clusters and Error Handling functions.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use Charts and Graphs.

    Objectives:

    1. Implement both single and multiple plot waveform charts.
    2. Implement both single and multiple plot waveform graphs.
    3. Create X-Y graphs.
    4. Create intensity charts and graphs utilizing color as a 3rd dimension.
    5. Add timestamps to charts and graphs.
    6. Create mixed signal graphs containing both analog and digital data.
    7. Export images of charts and graphs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to LabVIEW
      1. Dataflow and Graphical Programming Language
      2. Example Finder
      3. Temperature System Example
    2. Virtual Instrumentation
      1. Data Acquisition
      2. General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
      3. Communication via the Serial Port
      4. Internet connectivity and networking
      5. Add-on Toolkits
      6. Various Communication Mechanisms
    3. LabVIEW Operating Environment
      1. Front Panels, Controls and Indicators
      2. Block Diagrams
      3. LabVIEW Projects
      4. SubVI’s
      5. Alignment Grid
      6. Pull-Down Menus
      7. Floating Palettes
      8. Toolbars
      9. Pop-Up Menus
      10. Help Window
      11. Express and Sub VIs
    4. LabVIEW Foundations
      1. Creating VIs
      2. Basic Controls and Indicators
      3. Wire Routing
      4. Running VIs
      5. Keyboard Shortcuts and Tips
      6. Loading and Saving VIs
      7. Debugging Techniques
      8. Creating SubVIs
      9. Documenting Projects
      10. Printing
    5. Controlling Program Execution with Structures
      1. For and While Loops
      2. Shift Registers
      3. Case Structure
      4. Sequence Structure
      5. Timed Structures
      6. Formula and Expression Nodes
      7. Combining While Loops with Case Structure
    6. Arrays and Clusters
      1. Array Controls and Indicators
      2. Auto-Indexing
      3. Two Dimensional Arrays
      4. Compound Arithmetic
      5. Cluster Controls and Indicators
      6. Interchangeable Arrays and Clusters
      7. Error Clusters and Error Handling Functions
    7. Charts and Graphs
      1. Waveform Charts
      2. Waveform Graphs
      3. X-Y Graphs
      4. Chart and Graph Components
      5. Intensity Charts and Graphs
      6. Time Stamps
      7. Mixed Signal Graphs
      8. Exporting Images

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2160 - LabVIEW Basics 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 2150  

    (formerly ELEC 2912)

    ELEC 2160 will build upon the foundation of knowledge established in ELEC 2150  in further exploring the functionality of the LabVIEW programming platform.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assemble and manipulate Strings and File I/O.

    Objectives:

    1. Insert and execute various “” codes.
    2. Assemble and execute String Functions.
    3. Assemble and execute Parsing Functions.
    4. Implement File I/O Functions.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a working knowledge of Signal Measurement and Data Acquisition (DAQ).

    Objectives:

    1. Define various acronyms associated with DAQ.
    2. Interface the computer to real world devices.
    3. Define the various types and classification of signals that can be acquired.
    4. Compare conditioned and unconditioned signals. E. Implement and define signal sampling and aliasing.
    5. Select and define the configuration of DAQ hardware based upon the type of input data.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will utilize DAQ in order to interface to real-world projects.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the DAQ assistant.
    2. Define various terms associated with LabVIEW DAQ.
    3. Implement the use of NI-DAQmx tasks.
    4. Design a VI or subVI, which will stream data to a file.
    5. Utilize counters in order to measure digital events.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interface to Instrument Control logic.

    Objectives:

    1. Define Instrumentation Acronyms.
    2. Interface the LabVIEW platform to external instruments.
    3. Define the structure of Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA).
    4. Utilize the Instrument I/O Assistant.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW Structures and Functions.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply Local, Global, and Shared Variables.
    2. Control Parallel Loops.
    3. Affect program control via Property and Invoke Nodes.
    4. Implement Event Driven Programs.
    5. Utilize Type Definitions to simplify program edits.
    6. Design VIs with State Machines and the Queued Message Handlers.
    7. Implement programmed Structures for Disabling Code.
    8. Halt VI and Application Execution.
    9. Enhance the Graphic User Interface (GUI).

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW Data concepts.

    Objectives:

    1. Design and edit Polymorphic VIs.
    2. Implement programming language which manipulates Advanced File I/O.
    3. Reconfigure (INI) Files.
    4. Utilize Advanced Conversions and Typecasting.
    5. Convert Dissimilar Data Types to Variants.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW features.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the ‘Options’ dialog under Tools.
    2. Configure VI options.
    3. Manipulate Program Property options.
    4. Adjust Window Appearance options.
    5. Adjust Print and Execution options.
    6. Allow for Keyboard Navigation.
    7. Navigate within the VI Server.
    8. Understand Radices and Units.
    9. Create a SubVI from a Section of Block Diagram.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explore and implement LabVIEW Connectivity.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure LabVIEW’s built- in Web Server.
    2. Publish HTML with LabVIEW’s Web Server.
    3. Design and implement Remote Panels.
    4. Design VIs which can share variables over a network.
    5. Communicate with .NET and ActiveX Servers.
    6. Design Network VIs.
    7. Construct databases.
    8. Create and manipulate Reports.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will incorporate an aesthetically pleasing Graphical User Interface as part of the overall programming process.

    Objectives:

    1. Arrange, Decorate, Resize, Group, and Lock a Front Panel.
    2. Create Custom Front Panel Controls.
    3. Manipulate Text, Fonts and Color of a Front Panel.
    4. Import Graphs and Pictures for a Front Panel.
    5. Modularize VIs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Exploring Strings and File I/O
      1. Using String Functions
      2. Parsing Functions
      3. File Input/Output
    2. Signal Measurement, Generation and Data Acquisition (DAQ)
      1. Connecting the computer to the real world
      2. Various types of signals
      3. Configuring DAQ hardware
    3. Data Acquisition
      1. Digital and Analog I/O
      2. NI-DAQmx Tasks
      3. Advanced DAQ
    4. Instrument Control
      1. Connecting a computer to instruments
      2. SCPI instrument language
      3. VISA instrument communication
      4. Instrument control
    5. Advanced Structures and Functions
      1. Local, Global and Shared variables
      2. Property nodes
      3. Invoke nodes
      4. Event Driven programming
      5. Type definitions
      6. The State Machine and Queued Message Handler
      7. Messaging and synchronization
      8. Structures for disabling code
      9. Halting VI and application execution
    6. Advanced Data Concepts
      1. Advanced text, binary and configuration files
      2. Calling code from other languages
      3. Variants
    7. Advanced Features
      1. Configuring a VI
      2. The VI server
      3. Radices and Units
      4. Automatically creating a subVI from a section of Block Diagram
    8. Connectivity
      1. LabVIEW web server
      2. Emailing data
      3. Remote Panels
      4. Sharing data over a network
      5. Databases
    9. The Art of Programming
      1. Arranging, decorating, resizing, grouping, and locking
      2. Custom controls and indicators
      3. Adding online help
      4. Memory and performance

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2270 - Microcontroller Programming

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1192  or ELEC 2005 ; and ELEC 1211  

    (formerly EETE 2270)

    ELEC 2270 stresses the concepts of microcontroller programming including instruction sets, loops, software delays and data structures.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will employ microcontroller programming concepts.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Write and debug micro controller programs in assembly language or a higher-level language.
    2. Assemble or compile a program by hand or use an assembler or a compiler.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will develop instruction sets loops, software delays and data structure.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Assemble or compile a program by hand or use an assembler or a compiler.
    2. Load the program to a micro controller and run the program.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week  Topics
    1 & 2 Apply computer numbering systems
      Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    3 & 4 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    5 & 6 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    7 & 8 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    9 & 10 Write computer programs
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    11 & 12 Write computer programs
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    13 & 14 Write computer programs
      Analyze solid-state devices
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    15 & 16  Write computer programs
      Analyze solid-state devices

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jenneifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2300 - Motors for Electric Vehicles & Industrial Applications

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ELEC 2913)

    An introduction to A.C. motors and A.C. motor controls. Topics include: Fundamental concepts of electricity and magnetism, A.C. Motors, Traction Motors, A.C. Synchronous Permanent Magnet Motors, adjustable frequency drives, also MatLab and Simulink Modeling of various components associated with an electric vehicle.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of AC motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the parts of an AC motor.
    2. Describe the function of a three phase induction motor.
    3. Describe the function of single phase motors.
    4. Describe the advantages of three phase induction motors over single phase motors.
    5. Describe the operation of a three phase motor as it applies to the electric vehicle.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of an adjustable frequency drive.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of an adjustable frequency drive.
    2. Explain the operation of an adjustable frequency drive.
    3. Configure the drive parameters.
    4. Explain the operation of a bi-directional power supply.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design various parameters associated with an electric vehicle’s motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Using MatLab software the student will be able to model battery, motor and drive parameters.
    2. Using MatLab software the student will be able to adjust in real time parameters associated with bi-directional power supply.
    3. Using Simulink software the student will be able to program in 3D various motor parameters and view these parameters.
    4. Using Simulink software the student will be able to modify various parameters of an electric vehicle and see in real time what these effects have on the system.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Orientation - Introduction to single-phase motors
    2. Motor Operation Theory
    3. Basic Motor controls
    4. Introduction to three phase motors
    5. Three phase motor controls
    6. Theory of Operation: Adjustable frequency drive
    7. Configuring drive parameters
    8. Simulation of parameters using MatLab software
    9. Simulation of electric vehicle parameters using Simulink software

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2310 - Vehicle Experimental Testing

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1161 , ELEC 1171 , and ELEC 2150 

    This course develops the student’s applied knowledge and hands-on skills in vehicle experimental testing. Students will learn how to  set up test procedures, wire up sensors for measurements, conduct experimental tests, record calibrated experimental data, and write test reports.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Student will be able to apply safety protocols during experiments

    Objectives:
    1. Apply safety rules
    2. Analyze safety measures before starting any hands-on activity
    3. Recite safety protocols

    Outcome 2: Student will be able to set up test procedures, wire sensors, conduct experiments, and write reports

    Objectives:
    1. Compare electronic signals from common sensors used on vehicles
    2. Compare electronic signals from common sensors used in test instruments
    3. Measure and record electrical signals from sensors using a data acquisition systems such as LabView
    4. Compare static and dynamic characteristics of signals
    5. Utilize test instruments such as voltmeters, ammeters, pressure gages, etc.


    Outcome 3. Student will be able to compare Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, National Highway Transportation and Safety Administration test procedures, and Society of Automotive Engineers standards related to the course project

    Objectives:
    1. Analyze standards from different organizations and their importance
    2. Apply standards to vehicle systems

    Outcome 4. Students will be able to explain calibration procedures

    Objectives:
    1. Be able to explain the physical principal of each sensor
    2. Compare electrical signal of different sensors and test instruments
    3. Identify the physical principal (mass, length, time, force, energy, power) that determines the electrical output signal of a sensor

    Outcome 5. Student will be able to monitor vehicle networks such as the CAN bus

    Objectives:
    1. Compare different bus technologies
    2. Collect and analyze data from a vehicle bus using network analysis tools such as Vector hardware
    3. Monitor sensor variables
    4. Compute quantities communicated on the bus
    5. Record and analyze experimental data


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week(s) Topic(s)
    1 Lecture 1. Safety Instructions for Working in the Laboratory; Role of Experiments in Automotive Engineering
    Lecture 2. Measurement System: Structure and Components; Experiment Test Characteristics
    2 Lecture 1. Calibration
    Lecture 2. Instruments
    3 Lecture 1. Instrument Specifications
    Lecture 2. Signals Static and Dynamic Characteristics and Analysis of Experimental Data
    4 Lecture 1. DAQ for measuring electrical signals and recording experimental data on a computer
    Lecture 2. NI LabVIEW Fundamentals and Use in DAQ
    5 Lecture 1. NI myRIO Fundamentals and Use in Experiments
    Lecture 2. Test Report Writing and Presentation
    6 Lecture 1. Overview of vehicle networks, the CAN bus, senors, and algorithms
    Lecture 2. Vector CANalyser hardware and software and hands-on lab activity
    7 Lecture 1. Overview of FMVSS and NHTSA Test Procedures Related to the Course Project
    Lecture 2. Overview of SAE Standards Related to the Course Project.
    8 Session 1. Course Project Assignment: “Virtual Experimental Estimation of Wheel Rotational Speeds of a 4x4 Hybrid-Electric Vehicle”.
    Session 2. Working on the Project.
    9 Lab 1. Strain Gauge Designs, Wiring and Calibrating Strain Gauges
    Lab 2. Strain Gauges for Measuring Forces and Torques in Automotive Applications
    10 Lab 1. Hall-effect sensor concept design and applications for measuring wheel rotational speed in traction control systems and anti-lock brake systems
    Lab 1, continued
    11 Working on the Project
    12 Lab 1. Acceleration sensor concept design and application in the vehicle chassis system
    Lab 2. Acceleration sensor concept design and application in the vehicle chassis system (continuation)
    13 Working on the Project
    14 Lab 1. A lifting system with control - design
    Lab 2. A lifting system with control - a feedback control and data collection
    15 Lab 1. Kistler Wheel Transducer - Design and Measurement of Wheel Forces and Torques
    Lab 2. Virtual Vehicle Test on 4x4 Chassis Dynamometer with Individual Wheel Control
        • 4x4 Chassis dynamometer design
        • 4x4 Chassis dynamometer operational modes
        • Test procedure to study the tire rolling radius in the driven mode  
        • Use of Kistler wheel transducer
    16 Writing Project Reports and Presenting Project Outcomes (in groups)
    Final exam

     


    Primary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Secondary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2370 - Electrical-Polyphase Alternating Current Fundamentals, Electrical Instruments & Illumination

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1141  or related work experience

    (formerly ATEE 2360)

    ELEC 2370 covers three and four-wire two-phase circuits, three-phase induction, star and delta circuits, power, balanced and unbalanced loads, transformer principles, characteristics and connection, electrical instruments, self- synchronous systems, protective relays, lamps and illumination.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to differentiate between a WYE and a delta system.

    Objectives:

    1. Lay out a vector diagram of voltages in a three phase WYE circuit.
    2. Plot a vector diagram of voltages in a three-phase delta circuit.
    3. Apply the law of cosines to calculate the line current in a three-phase system.
    4. Calculate the power, the true power, and the total power in three phase systems.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to define the operation of a transformer.

    Objectives:

    1. Define step down transformer, step up transformer, transformer efficiency, exciting current, ampere-turns, and primary winding to secondary winding voltage and current ratios.
    2. Explain feedback from one secondary winding to the other primary winding and state the steps that must be taken to minimize this hazard.
    3. List the information provided on the nameplate of a transformer.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Review - Alternating Currents
    2. Review - Inductive and Capacitive Reactances
    3. Three-Phase voltages, phase sequence, the WYE connection
    4. The Delta Connection
    5. Power Measurement in Three-Phase Systems
    6. Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter, Varmeter, Power Factor Meter
    7. Syncroscope, Frequency Meters, Recording Instruments, Watt-Hour Meter
    8. Transformer Primary and Secondary Ratios, Losses and Efficiency, Polarity
    9. Multiple Tapped Winding, Transformer Cooling, Transformer Oil, Taps, Frequency, Volts, Impedance, Data
    10. Delta Connection, WYE Connection, Delta-WYE Connection
    11. WYE-Delta Connection, Open-Delta, Three-Phase Transformer
    12. Instrument Transformers, Auto Transformers
    13. Constant Current Transformers, Induction Voltage Regulators

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2380 - Electrical-Alternating Current Machines

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 2370  or related work experience

    (formerly ATEE 2260)

    ELEC 2380 examines alternators, rotating magnetic fields, A.C. motors, speed control, types of winding, introduction to A.C. motor control.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course, students will be able to classify alternators by the type of construction used and their principle of operation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation of a filed discharge circuit used with the separately excited field in an alternator.
    2. List the method of cooling and ventilation used in large alternators.
    3. Define synchronous impedance and synchronous reactance.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course, students will be able to describe the construction of the synchronous motor, listing all of its components and explain the function of each component.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the steps in the operation of the synchronous motor from the moment it is energized until the motor locks in at the synchronous speed.
    2. Calculate the synchronous speed of the three-phase synchronous motor.
    3. Explain how a synchronous motor may be used to correct the power factor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Generator Principles, Power Factor, Alternator Impedance
    2. Regulation, Control, Synchronization
    3. Rotating Magnetic Field, Speed, Pole Frequency, Slip
    4. Operating Characteristics, Squirrel Cage, Induction Motor Advantages
    5. Torque Speed, Power Factor, Motor and Power Calculation, Dual Voltage, Code Letter
    6. Name Plate Data, Wound Rotor Motor Torque and Speed, Characteristics
    7. Synchronous Motor Principles, Speed and Power Factor
    8. Across the Line and Reversing Starters, Plugging, Braking
    9. Reduced Voltage Starting, Motor Response, Resistance Method
    10. Autotransformer, Part Winds
    11. Star-Delta, Two Speed, Two Winding
    12. Two Speed, One Winding, Four Speed, Dual Winding
    13. Wound Motor Controllers, Manual and Automatic
    14. Single Phase Motors, Induction & Conduction

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2400 - Microprocessor Interfacing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 2270  or EETE 2270

    (formerly EETE 2400)

    ELEC 2400 covers interfacing the microcomputer in serial and parallel format. Topics include handshake control, PIA, ACIA, UARTS, AD and DA conversions, interfacing the microcomputer to TTYs CRTs Modems, floppy disks, dynamic and static memories, and electrical/mechanical devices.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will interface a micro controller to various electronic and electromechanical devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an ASCII character, the student will draw the timing diagrams for asynchronous serial data in TTL and RS232 formats.
    2. Given the timing diagram for the Centronics parallel interface, the student will show the proper hardware connections and the assembly code needed to send ASCII characters to a printer.
    3. The student will Interface an LCD display, and by writing the proper assembly code, display messages or patterns.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will program and apply parallel, serial, A/D and timer circuitry to various interfacing projects.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the timing diagram for the Centronics parallel interface, the student will show the proper hardware connections and the assembly code needed to send ASCII characters to a printer.
    2. The student will write interrupt service routines to accomplish tasks specified by the instructor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic

    1. Hardware Pg. 203
    2. Basic I/O Ports (Parallel I/O)
    3. 8-5 —- 8-8 Interrupts and Polling
    4. Serial I/O
    5. Timing Systems and Port A
    6. A/D
    7. Microprocessor Control and Memories
    8. Final Project:

    A final project is given in which the student must combine hardware and software to meet the specifications outline by the instructor. The student must design the hardware and generate the software necessary to accomplish the task specified. Some outside research may be necessary. Examples of previous projects include: talking voltmeters, speech recognition, digital oscilloscope, using speech synthesis to provide output for a series of game modules, electronic curve tracing turtle, etc


    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2410 - Electrical-National Electrical Code

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ATEE 2410)

    ELEC 2410 studies national and local electrical codes for wiring and apparatus. It covers wiring design and protection, wiring methods and materials, general use equipment, special occupancies, special equipment, and the use of tables and diagrams for the solution of practical wiring problems.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to correctly use the N.E.C. book.

    Objectives:

    1. Correctly access the information contained in this syllabus.
    2. Find the correct wire size for a specific installation.
    3. Calculate the size of feeders and wires needed for a specific installation.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to, using the current N.E.C. book, calculate the size of conductors needed to wire a motor.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the N.E.C. table, size the conductor.
    2. Using the N.E.C. table, size the conduit.
    3. Using the N.E.C. table, size the motor starter.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various hazardous locations and describe the type of conduit and conductors needed at a specific location.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify a Class 1 location.
    2. Identify a Class 2 location.
    3. Identify a Class 3 location.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to NEC/Definitions
    2. Boxes and Enclosures
    3. Cables
    4. Raceways and Conductors
    5. General Provisions (One Family Dwellings)
    6. Specific Provisions
    7. General Provisions (Commercial)
    8. Hazardous Locations
    9. Industrial
    10. Special Occupancies
    11. Specific Equipment

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2490 - Instrumentation 2-Advanced Op-Amps & Linear Integrated Circuits

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 2010 

    (formerly EETE 2490)

    ELEC 2490 focuses on operational amplifier applications, passive and active filters, voltage compositors, phase-locked-loop and data acquisition.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in special purpose electronic circuits which contain operational amplifiers.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Construct and evaluate comparator circuits.
    2. Construct and evaluate summing amplifiers.
    3. Construct and evaluate integrators and differentiators.
    4. Troubleshoot special purpose op‐amp circuits.
    5. Evaluate instrumentation and isolation amplifiers.
    6. Evaluate log and antilog amplifiers.
    7. Evaluate converter circuitry.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in special purpose electronic circuits which contain active op‐amp filters.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Analyze and derive basic filter responses and characteristics.
    2. Construct and evaluate active low‐pass and high‐pass filters.
    3. Construct and evaluate band‐pass and band‐stop filters.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic oscillator circuits which contain linear devices.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Construct and evaluate RC feedback circuits.
    2. Analyze and evaluate LC feedback circuits.
    3. Analyze and evaluate relaxation oscillators.
    4. Construct and analyze circuits containing electronic timers such as the 555.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build, and take measurements in voltage regulation circuits which contain linear devices.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Construct and evaluate basic linear series and shunt voltage regulator circuits.
    2. Construct and evaluate basic switching regulator circuits.
    3. Construct and evaluate integrated circuit voltage regulators.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build, and take measurements in basic analog communication circuitry.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Analyze and evaluate basic receiver circuits.
    2. Analyze and evaluate amplitude modulation circuitry.
    3. Analyze and evaluate AM demodulation circuitry.
    4. Analyze and evaluate IF and Audio amplifiers.
    5. Analyze and evaluate frequency modulation circuitry.
    6. Analyze and evaluate integrated phase locked loop circuitry

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Basic Op‐amp Circuits
      1. Comparators
      2. Su0mming amplifiers
      3. Integrators and differentiators
      4. Troubleshooting
    2. Special Purpose Op‐amp Circuits
      1. Instrumentation and isolation amplifiers
      2. Operational transconductance amplifiers
      3. Log and antilog amplifiers
      4. Converters
    3. Active Filters
      1. Basic filter response and characteristics
      2. Active low‐pass and high‐pass filters
      3. Active band‐pass and stop‐pass filters
    4. Oscillators
      1. Feedback principles
      2. RC and LC feedback
      3. Relaxation oscillators
      4. Linear integrated timer circuits
    5. Voltage Regulators
      1. Basic series and shunt regulators
      2. Basic switching regulators
      3. Integrated circuit voltage regulators
    6. Analog Communications Circuits
      1. Basic receivers
      2. Linear multipliers
      3. Amplitude modulation
      4. AM demodulation
      5. IF and audio amplifiers
      6. Frequency modulation
      7. Phase locked loops

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2550 - Electrical-Industrial Electronic Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 1141  or related work experience

    (formerly ATEE 2550)

    ELEC 2550 provides an introduction to electronics which includes semiconductor theory and circuits, transistor theory and circuits, power supplies, oscillator circuits, photosensitive devices, and pulse circuits.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify a diode and describe its construction and fabrication.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the characteristics of a silicon diode.
    2. Describe the characteristics of a germanium diode.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and calculate the output voltages of a DC power supply.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the operation of a half wave rectifier.
    2. Describe the operation of a full wave rectifier.
    3. Describe the operation of a full wave bridge rectifier.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and explain the operation of transducers.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain the operation of a thermistor.
    2. Identify a hall effect sensor.
    3. Explain the operation of a hall effect sensor.
    4. Explain a Diac, Triac and UJT transistor.
    5. Explain the operation of a Diac, Triac and UJT transistor.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the operation of transistor.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the leads of various transistors.
    2. Identify and describe the operation of a/an SCR, TRIAC, DIAC and unijunction transistor.
    3. Identify and describe the operation of a/an FET, JFET, MOSFET.
    4. Identify and describe the operation of an integrated circuit.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Safety, PC Board, Construction and Repair
    2. Semiconductor Materials; Diode Testing, Installation and Service
    3. Practical Application of Diodes; Clipping and Clamping Circuits, Zener Diode
    4. DC Power Supplies, AC and DC Voltage Measurements
    5. Power Supply Filters, Voltage Dividers and Multipliers
    6. Thermistors, Photoelectric Transducers, LEDs and LCDs
    7. Transistors Basics, Operating Curves. and Load Lines
    8. Transistor Biasing, Power Dissipation, Transistor Testing
    9. SCR Basics and Applications, SCR Testing
    10. Triacs, Diacs and UJTs
    11. Transistors as AC Amplifiers, Classes of Operation
    12. Field Effect Transistors, Amplifier Coupling, Darlington Circuit
    13. IC Packages, PIN Numbering System, Operational Amplifiers
    14. Application of OP Amps, IC Timers, Oscillators, Digital ICs

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Seger, Jennifer
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2560 - Electrical-Welding Controllers

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ELEC 2550  or related work experience

    (formerly ATEE 2560)

    Resistance welders and controllers are the main topics of ELEC 2560. Subtopics include spot welders, various types of welder controllers, plug-in accessories, test equipment, portable and stationary welders, and arc welders.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to describe the operation of a resistance welder.

    Objectives:

    1. Resistance welding fundamentals familiarization.
    2. Resistance welding block diagram elements and configuration.
    3. Resistance welding machine timing relations.
    4. Resistance welding schedules for uncoated and coated steels and their application.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to identify spot, seam, and projection welding process variations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify/describe the operation of a spot welder.
    2. Identify/describe the operation of a seam welder.
    3. Identify/describe the operation of a projection welder.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to describe the operation of a welding system.

    Objectives:

    1. Welding transformer needs and parameters.
    2. Welding contractor requirements applications.
    3. Identify the welding cooling requirements.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to identify stick, MIG, and TIG welding variations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify/describe the operation of a stick welder.
    2. Identify/describe the operation of a MIG welder.
    3. Identify/describe the operation of a TIG welder.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction to the Resistance Welding Process, Applications, and Overview
    2. Basic Resistance Welding Circuit
    3. The Basic Resistance Welding Machine and Its Electrical Components
    4. The Welding Machine and Its Mechanical Components
    5. Timing Relations; Squeeze, Weld, Hold, and Off5
    6. Ignitions and SCRs and Their Uses as a Contactor
    7. Duty Cycle and its Importance in an Intermittently Powered Device
    8. Welding Transformers, Selection, and Ratings
    9. Intermittent Contactors and Their Sizing
    10. R. W. Schedules for Uncoated and Coated Mild Steel Materials
    11. Equipment Selection and Sizing Based upon Material to be Welded
    12. The Welding Control Requirements and Other Instrumentation
    13. Procedure for Set‐Up of a Resistance Welding System
    14. Arc Welding Fundamentals and Basic Equipment for the Process

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty
    Mielke, Michael
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Emergency Medical Services

  
  • EMSA 1215 - Basic Emergency Medical Technician Lecture

    Credit Hours: 7.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: EMSA 1220  and EMSA 1250 

    EMSA 1215 provides an introduction to Basic EMT. It is designed to provide the student with an outline of the EMS system and introduce assessment skills, as well as provide treatment and pathophysiologic understanding to common medical and traumatic emergencies.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a productive and professional attitude towards the learning, work, and patient environments.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate organization, preparedness, perseverance, integrity, and respect for others.
    2. Display courtesy, punctuality, organization, and a pride in the professional appearance.
    3. Demonstrate empathy for and a desire to help all patients, real or simulated.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the role and responsibilities of the basic EMT in the medical and emergency fields.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the evolution of the EMT.
    2. Comply with all laws that govern the EMT’s interaction with patients, coworkers, and with the community.
    3. Know the requirements with regard to communication, documentation, equipment maintenance, and protocols.
    4. Assess the situation and determine if there is need for a paramedic unit.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the importance of an effective and naturalized patient assessment and for determining a treatment plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the importance of and consistently perform a scene size‐up.
    2. Know the procedures for and consistently perform an initial assessment.
    3. Identify the difference between a rapid trauma, focused trauma, rapid medical, and focused medical assessment, and be able to apply each assessment appropriately.
    4. Utilize communication and critical thinking skills to obtain a realistic impression of the patient and the situation.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage a patient with a medical complaint across the lifespan.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the pathophysiology of the medical complaint as it relates to patient care
    2. Perform a correct body-system assessment as it relates to the chief complaint
    3. Establish a differential diagnosis based on complaint and assessment findings
    4. Recognize a patient with adequate or compromised perfusion
    5. Establish and manage appropriate ventilatory support
    6. Implement the correct treatment following patient assessment
    7. Implement the correct pharmacologic treatment plan

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assess a traumatic scene or an injured patient and determine the extent of their injuries, quickly applying treatments in a manner that will not harm them nor significantly delay hospital intervention.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret findings from the scene size‐up or from the initial patient survey to conduct a rapid trauma assessment or a focused trauma assessment appropriately.
    2. Call for the rapid trauma assessment in a manner that doesn’t cause additional injury, nor substantially delays hospital intervention.
    3. Detect hypoperfusion in the trauma patient and manage it correctly.
    4. Manage specific injuries such as blunt, penetrating, fractured, burnt, or crushing.
    5. Modify his/her trauma assessment or management for injuries occurring in the head, face, neck, spinal column, thorax, or abdomen.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the underlying physiological changes that occur during fetal development for both mother and child and manage obstetrical, gynecological, or pediatric emergencies.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the basic structure of the reproductive system.
    2. Identify the physiological changes that occur in both mother and fetus during pregnancy.
    3. Manage a normal labor and delivery.
    4. Handle obstetrical emergencies such as abnormal presentation, neonatal resuscitation, or post‐partum hemorrhage.
    5. Identify the physiological differences between an adult and pediatric, including vital signs, and modify his/her treatment to accommodate the pediatric patient.
    6. Identify common childhood diseases and know the appropriate treatment for each.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the physiological changes to the body caused by various environmental conditions and will be able to safely and effectively manage each.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the effects of hypoxia via asphyxiation, poisoning, or submersion, and manage the patient in each scenario.
    2. Manage correctly the patient suffering from burns, frostbite, hyperthermia, or hypothermia.
    3. Identify the signs of toxic inhalation or injection, and correctly and safely manage the patient.
    4. Manage patients suffering from injuries resulting from barotrauma related to diving injuries. 
    5. Manage patients suffering injuries from bites or stings from various terrestrial and aquatic animals/insects

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the Incident Command System and participate in a multiple casualty incident in a productive manner while assuring for the safety of self, coworkers, patient, and community.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate knowledge of the incident command system.
    2. Identify the goals of each sector.
    3. Perform a field triage in a manner that efficiently delivers patients to treatment.
    4. Identify the process of staging, communication, and transport in a multiple casualty incident (MCI).
    5. Identify the need for critical incident stress debriefing after or a defusing during an MCI.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Introduction, Roles, Medical Legal

    Module 2: Respiratory and Ventilatory Assessment and Support

    Module 3: Neurological Assessment and Support

    Module 4: Cardiovascular Assessment and Support

    Module 5: Traumatic Injury

    Module 6: Obstetrics and Gynecology

    Module 7: Environmental Emergencies and Altered L.O.C. (Level Of Consciousness)

    Module 8: Multiple Casualty Incidents


    Primary Faculty
    Media, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 1220 - Basic EMT Lab

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: EMSA 1215  and EMSA 1250 

    (formerly EMTC 1220)

    Practical skills of Basic EMT are learned.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to lift weighted mannequins and stretchers in a manner that is productive, yet utilizes proper lifting mechanics to avoid injury.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize proper lift mechanics and techniques to assure that the patient is lifted without injury to the student.
    2. Identify the importance of proper lift mechanics as necessary to assure longevity in the career.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will learn, practice, then naturalize a correct initial assessment then select and perform the correct secondary assessment with treatments being done in their correct order.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand that the initial assessment is designed to detect life threats.
    2. Be proficient in performing an initial assessment.
    3. On the basis of the scene size‐up and initial assessment, correctly select a secondary assessment as being rapid trauma, focused trauma, rapid medical, or focused medical.
    4. Utilize the information in the scene size‐up, initial assessment, and secondary assessments to provide proper medical treatment and transport considerations.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assess the respiratory status of a patient, determining if it is adequate, or suggestive of other conditions, and correctly manage it with airway, oxygen, and ventilation devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Assess a patient to determine if the respiratory status is inadequate, absent, normal, or suggestive of other conditions.
    2. Given a scenario, choose then use a basic airway device or technique.
    3. Determine if ventilatory support is adequate, then give support efficiently.
    4. Given a scenario, select the correct oxygen delivery device, then use it correctly.
    5. Identify the advanced airway devices and techniques.
    6. Given the scenario, identify pharmacologic interventions that may be employed

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assess the patient to determine if he/she has sufficient cardiac output to maintain a blood pressure, if not being able to quickly, correctly, and efficiently initiate CPR and early defibrillation.

    Objectives:

    1. Use the initial assessment to determine if the patient has a pulse and if it is adequate to sustain a blood pressure.
    2. Correctly, quickly, and efficiently begin cardiopulmonary resuscitation.
    3. Know when to use and how to properly operate an automatic external defibrillator.
    4. Supplement ventilations with supplemental oxygenation quickly, correctly, and efficiently.
    5. Given the scenario, identify pharmacologic interventions that may be employed

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will determine from the scene size‐up, initial and trauma assessments that the patient requires some manner of spinal immobilization, bleeding control, or splinting, or shock management, and can perform it in an efficient, naturalized manner, incorporating oxygen therapy or CPR in a way that will not substantially delay hospital intervention.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret findings from the scene size‐up, initial, or secondary assessment to correctly determine that the patient requires trauma management.
    2. Detect the need for spinal immobilization and efficiently perform in it in a naturalized manner that would not bring any further injury to the patient.
    3. Decide if the patient’s condition indicates a rapid trauma or a focused trauma assessment and then correctly perform the indicated assessment.
    4. Perform an effective assessment and detect all bleeding or musculoskeletal injuries, and then correctly perform the skills of bleeding control, splinting, or traction splinting.
    5. Interpret the patient finding s to determine if the patient is currently unstable or at risk for becoming unstable, and then implement shock management techniques in a correct and efficient manner.
    6. Interpret the patient physical findings to determine if they are currently unstable or at risk for becoming unstable, then using their findings to prioritize his/her treatment and transport considerations.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will utilize scene size‐up, and initial patient survey to determine which secondary survey is appropriate, then implementing it correctly, efficiently and in a thorough manner, interpreting findings to correctly detect the patient’s condition, and identifying appropriate treatments and transport decision.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize a scene size‐up and initial patient survey to detect life‐threats, calling for the appropriate treatment, then correctly selecting the appropriate secondary assessment.
    2. Correctly choose the appropriate secondary assessment to determine the patient’s condition.
    3. Perform an efficient and thorough secondary assessment to detect all significant findings required to provide an adequate interpretation of the patient’s condition.
    4. Select the appropriate treatments and transport decisions based upon assessment findings and call for them in the appropriate order.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate proper techniques for medication administration.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the oral, intra-nasal, IM, and Sub‐Q routes for medication administration.
    2. Explain the proper steps of medication administration.
    3. Identify the appropriate mediation therapies and administration routes
    4. Identify non‐parenteral drug therapies
    5. Explain the practices regarding the storing, and restocking of medications as well as the documentation of their administration.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Lifting and Moving Patients

    Module 2: Patient Assessment

    Module 3: Airway and Ventilatory Support

    Module 4: CPR

    Module 5: Trauma Management

    Module 6: Total Patient Management


    Primary Faculty
    Media, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 1250 - Clinical Rotation for the Basic EMT

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: EMSA 1215  and EMSA 1220 

    (formerly EMTC 1250)

    Clinical rotation in the hospital and EMS units for the Basic EMT. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2.5

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate appropriateness for the clinical environment by providing the program, department, and/or hospital with the necessary documentation.

    Objectives:

    1. Complete hospital‐required documentation before beginning any clinical rotation.
    2. Provide the Health and Public Service Department with a physical exam, drug screen and criminal background check before beginning any clinical.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will begin to meet the National Standard Curriculum requirements for contact hours.

    Objectives:

    1. Meet the State of Michigan and National Standard Curriculum requirements for EMS agency hours.
    2. Meet the State of Michigan and National Standard Curriculum requirements for hospital hours.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will utilize the life‐skills of professionalism, punctuality, integrity, and interpersonal communications with the intention of developing an excellent working situation and patient rapport.

    Objectives:

    1. Appears professionally and appropriately dressed and is prepared for all clinical rotations.
    2. Attend all scheduled clinical rotations, and is in the appropriate department, ready to work, in a punctual manner.
    3. Handle any absences or schedule changes in a manner that would be perceived by any clinical facility as professional, honest, and courteous.
    4. Treats any clinical preceptor, manager, or department employee as a direct supervisor, and as such is professional, honest, and courteous.
    5. Assures that all patient interactions are done in the best interest of the patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Hospital Rotations
    Primary Faculty
    Media, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2510 - Introduction to Paramedic Procedures

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Permission from instructor

    Corequisites: EMSA 2520 , EMSA 2530 , and EMSA 2550  

    This course provides an introduction to paramedic procedures. It reviews traumatic injuries and the physical exam, and prepares the student to enter the clinical environment.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with the policies and procedures of the EMS department and its associated clinical facilities.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will read and verify having read the booklet of policies and procedures of the EMS department.
    2. The student will itemize the outline for the paramedic program.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will develop a productive and professional aħtude towards the learning, work, and patient environments.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will value organization, preparedness, perseverance, integrity, and respect for others.
    2. The student will display courtesy, punctuality, organization, and a pride in the professional appearance.
    3. The student will demonstrate empathy for, and a desire to help all patients, real or simulated.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will acquire the Advanced Life Support (ALS) assessment skills needed to evaluate a patient.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will appreciate the importance of, and consistently perform a scene size‐up.
    2. The student will know the procedures for and consistently perform an initial assessment.
    3. The student will differentiate between a rapid trauma, focused trauma, rapid medical, and focused medical assessment, and be able to apply each assessment appropriately.
    4. The student will demonstrate the basic focused assessments, and be able to include the ALS assessment findings and interventions to them.
    5. The student will be able to utilize communication and critical thinking skills to obtain a realistic impression of the patient and the situation.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage the patient with respiratory emergencies.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will learn the structures of the respiratory system, and understand it significance to homeostasis.
    2. The student will be able to perform an adequate and thorough respiratory assessment, synthesize the significance of all findings.
    3. The student will be able to efficiently establish and maintain proper ventilatory support.
    4. The student will learn ALS techniques for establishing and evaluating an advanced airway.
    5. The student will be able to perform surgical techniques to assure adequate respirations in a patient.
    6. The student will be able to adequately administer appropriate respiratory drug therapies.
    7. The student will have an awareness of common pulmonary disabilities.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage the patient having a localized or systemic allergic reaction.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage the patient with neurological emergencies.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will know the anatomical structures of the neurological system, and its protective structures.
    2. The student will itemize the physiological requirements of the neurological system.
    3. The student will be able to assess the status of the patient’s neurological system.
    4. The student will be able to manage neurological disabilities such as intracranial bleeds, ischemic strokes, seizures, injury, intoxication, and inflammation.
    5. The student will be able to manage the spinal column or individual nerve tracts in traumatic injury.
    6. The student will have an awareness of common neurological disabilities.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage the patient with traumatic injuries.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will identify the physiological changes that occur as a patient enters shock.
    2. The student will be able to manage a patient that is bleeding.
    3. The student will be able to manage the patient with a blunt force trauma.
    4. The student will be able to address the specific concerns as it relates to trauma or bleeding to the abdomen, chest, face, neck, and nervous system.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, students will have completed any computer‐generated assignments identified as the accompaniment to lecture material.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will have prepared for each class period by completing and presenting computer‐generated assignments.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Preparatory

    Module 2: Respiratory and Anaphylaxis

    Module 3: Neurological

    Module 4: Trauma


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2520 - Pharmacology for the Paramedic 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    Corequisites: EMSA 2510 , EMSA 2530 , and EMSA 2550  

    (formerly EMTC 2520)

    Study of generalized drug therapy for the paramedic.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be aware of the history, regulation, classifications, and pharmacodynamics of drugs.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be aware of the history, regulation, and classification of drugs.
    2. Understand the concepts of pharmokinetics, biotransformation, therapeutic levels, and excretion of drugs.
    3. Demonstrate his/her ability to correctly select, administer, document, and then resupply drugs pursuant to applicable protocol.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to correctly and safely administer drugs through various routes.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper technique for administration of a prescribed drug through various routes. These routes include but are not limited to: oral, mucosal, aerosolized, IM, subcutaneous, transdermal, and IV.
    2. Display the practiced and proficient psychomotor techniques for the administration of drugs through various routes.
    3. Utilize all safety precautions such as assessing for allergies, utilizing protective equipment, and disposing of unused drugs or administration equipment.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be proficient at calculations that would administer the correct dosage of medication to a real or simulated patient.

    Objectives:

    1. Proficiently calculate a patient’s weight in metric units.
    2. Understand the correlation between the mass of a drug with the volume of solution in which the drug is suspended.
    3. Correctly calculate the prescribed dosage and administer it via the solution on hand.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the underlying physiology that is being targeted by respiratory, neurological, cardiac drugs as well as drugs used in allergic reactions.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the relationship between the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system, and how the balance in manipulated by medications.
    2. Identify the physiology, including the properties of specific receptor sites, of the respiratory, neurological, cardiac, and immunological systems.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will define the importance of interstitial, intra and extra cellular fluid and electrolytes.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the significance of electrolytes, as well know which electrolytes are intracellular, and which are extracellular.
    2. Describe the concept of osmotic pressure, and appreciate its importance in homeostasis.
    3. Describe the balance of acid and base, appreciate its significance in homeostasis, and be able to manage it through ventilation, diuretics, and alkalizing agents.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will differentiate the role of IV fluids as routes for drug administration, volume expanders, as well as their function as hypertonic, isotonic, and hypotonic solutions.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate the correlation between osmotic pressure as it relates to hypertonic, isotonic, and hypotonic solutions.
    2. Correctly select a hypertonic, isotonic, or hypotonic solution based upon the needs of the patient.
    3. Correctly calculate and administer a fluid bolus based upon the needs of the patient.
    4. Establish an IV solution to act as a transport for medication.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Introduction to Pharmacology

    Module 2: Drug Administration

    Module 3: Fluids and Electrolytes/Acid Base

    Module 4: Condition Specific Drugs


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2530 - Paramedic Lab 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    Corequisites: EMSA 2510 , EMSA 2520 , and EMSA 2550  

    (formerly EMTC 2530)

    Practical applications for Introduction to Paramedic Procedures and Paramedic Lecture 2.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, through the assessment process the student will identify the correct field‐impression of a real or simulated patient.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will identify the steps of the medical and trauma assessment.
    2. The students will explain the steps of the medical and trauma assessment.
    3. The student will incorporate advanced techniques at the appropriate place in the assessment process.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the students will incorporate advanced airway techniques at the appropriate point in patient management.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will properly demonstrate basic techniques for airway control.
    2. The student will identify the proper steps of endotracheal intubation
    3. The student will explain the proper steps of endotracheal intubation
    4. The student will identify the circumstances surrounding the need to employ a surgical technique for airway maintenance

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate proper techniques for drug and fluid administration.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to correctly utilize the IV, IM, Sub‐Q routes for drug administration.
    2. The students will identify the proper steps of parenteral drug and fluid administration.
    3. The students will explain the proper steps of parenteral drug and fluid administration.
    4. The student will correctly identify the appropriate drug therapies and administration routes
    5. The student will correctly identify non‐parenteral drug therapies
    6. The student will explain the practices regarding the storing, and restocking of drugs as well as the documentation of their administration.

    Outcome 4:
    Students will appropriately operate the EKG/defibrillator.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to perform normal EKG function and maintenance.
    2. The student will be able to safely and correctly perform a defibrillation in a pulseless V‐Tach or V‐fib cardiac rhythm.
    3. The student will be able to safely and correctly perform a synchronized cardioversion in a tachycardic rhythm with a pulse.
    4. The student will be able to safely and correctly implement the technique of transcutaneous pacing in an unstable bradycardic patient.
    5. The student will identify dynamic cardiac rhythms on the EKG monitor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Trauma Management and Patient Assessment

    Module 2: Airway Management and Respiratory Support

    Module 3: Parenteral Administration of Fluids and Drugs

    Module 4: EKG Use


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2550 - Paramedic Lecture 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2510  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: EMSA 2520  and EMSA 2530 

    (formerly EMTC 2550)

    This course presents a study of cardiology and introduction to the EKG.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the physiology of the myocardial cell.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Identify the roles of anions and cations in the function of the cell.
    2. Identify the relationships between myocardial cells, the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous systems.
    3. Identify resting and action potentials as it relates to normal and abnormal cardiac rhythms.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the mechanics and dynamics of the cardiovascular system, as they relate to perfusion.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Identify the interaction between cardiac output, peripheral resistance, preload pressures in the maintenance of perfusion.
    2. Be able to manage the patient in hypoperfusion due to failure in cardiac output, peripheral resistance, or preload.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will interpret the EKG, and understand its significance.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Itemize the structures of the heart’s conduction system and their participation in the normal cardiac cycle.
    2. Be able to interpret the waveforms of the EKG, and relate them back to cardiac function, or malfunction.
    3. Describe underlying pathologies and the dangers from abnormal electrical conduction in the heart.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the safe and efficient operation of the EKG monitor and defibrillator.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Be able to locate Leads I, II, and III, and interpret the waveforms that originate from them.
    2. Be able to perform the normal functions of the EKG monitor/defibrillator.
    3. Be able to correctly implement the electrical therapies of defibrillation, synchronized cardioversion, and external pacing.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will learn the current Advanced Cardiac Life Support, (ACLS,) algorithms.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Demonstrate compliance with current ACLS guidelines.
    2. Be able to rationalize the reasons for the current ACLS guidelines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Cardiac anatomy and physiology

    Module 2: The basics of EKG

    Module 3: ACLS guidelines for management


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2560 - Paramedic Lecture 3

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2550  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: EMSA 2570 , EMSA 2580 , and EMSA 2612  

    (formerly EMTC 2560)

    Study of common medical emergencies, obstetrics, shock, and allergies.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interact with, evaluate, and appropriately manage the types of patients that the paramedic will frequently encounter.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Identify the social, economic, psychological, and sensory impairments that degrade the quality of life in the geriatric.
    2. Employ methods to overcome sensory disabilities, and effectively communicate with the geriatric patient.
    3. Describe how frequently occurring chronic medical problems can affect the assessment and management of patients.
    4. Be able to identify the significance of, and operate around common home care medical devices, as well as indwelling lines and catheters.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will itemize the underlying pathologies of common medical conditions.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Describe the role of the nephrology system in its function in pH and electrolyte balance, blood pressure maintenance, and elimination of toxins.
    2. Be able to identify and manage the patient in renal failure.
    3. Describe the roles and properties of each organ in the digestive system.
    4. Be able to manage common metabolic related medical conditions.

    Outcome 3:

    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interact, evaluate, and address the special needs of some frequently encountered patients.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Become empathetic with the conditions of the geriatric patient, the patient with specific disabilities, and the chronically ill.
    2. Modify his/her communication styles to accommodate the geriatric patients, patients with specific disabilities and the chronically ill.
    3. Be able to accommodate the specific needs of the geriatric patient, the patient with specific disabilities, and the chronically ill.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to manage the gynecological, obstetrical, neonatal, or pediatric patient.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. List the physiology of human reproduction, as well as the physiological changes in the pregnant woman.
    2. Be able to assist in the delivery of, then care for the neonate as well as the post partum woman.
    3. Be able to identify abnormal and life‐threatening complications of delivery and correctly manage them.
    4. Differentiate the physiological differences between the pediatric and the adult, and be able to modify his/her treatment to accommodate the differences.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the pathophysiology, assessment findings and management of frequently occurring environmental emergencies.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Be able to identify the health dangers in temperature extremes, and manage the hyper/hypothermic patient.
    2. Identify the physiological mechanisms involved in salt, fresh, cold water drowning and near drowning.
    3. Be able to resuscitate or otherwise manage the drowning or near drowning patient.
    4. Identify the physiological problems caused by situations of high or low pressure, and correctly manage each situation.
    5. Be able to manage the situation in which a patient is exposed to a toxic, corrosive, or other intolerable environment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Geriatric, chronically ill, and disabled patients

    Module 2: Neonatal, gynecological, and pediatric patients

    Module 3: Digestive and Excretory problems

    Module 4: Environmental Emergencies


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2570 - Pharmacology for the Paramedic 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2520  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: EMSA 2560 , EMSA 2580 , and EMSA 2612  

    (formerly EMTC 2570)

    Study of cardiac-related drug therapy for the paramedic.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to correctly and safely administer drugs through various routes.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the proper technique for administration of a prescribed drug through various routes. These routes include but are not limited to: oral, mucosal, aerosolized, IM, subcutaneous, transdermal, and IV.
    2. Display the practiced and proficient psychomotor techniques for the administration of drugs through various routes.
    3. Utilize all safety precautions such as assessing for allergies, utilizing protective equipment, and disposing of unused drugs or administration equipment.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be proficient at calculations that would administer the correct dosage of medication to a real or simulated patient.

    Objectives:

    1. Proficiently calculate a patient’s weight in metric units.
    2. Define the correlation between the mass of a drug with the volume of solution in which the drug is suspended.
    3. Correctly calculate the prescribed dosage and administer it via the solution on hand.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will define the underlying physiology that is being targeted by antihypertensive drugs.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the relationship between the renin‐angiotension system, blood pressure, and antihypertensive medicines.
    2. Define the relationship between physiology, blood pressure, diuretics, and electrolyte balance.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the underlying physiology that is being targeted by endocrine drugs.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the pathophysiology of diabetes (type I, II, and gestational onset) and be able to manage a patient who is hypoglycemic, hyperglycemic, or acidotic.
    2. Have knowledge of other commonly occurring endocrine disorders and be familiar with the medications frequently prescribed for them.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the physiological changes that occur during fetal development, both in mother and child, and during pediatric development, and be able to modify current drug therapies or implement specific drug therapies.

    Objectives:

    1. Have an appreciation of the changes that occur during pregnancy.
    2. Modify his/her normal drug therapy to accommodate the pregnant patient.
    3. Manage gynecological or obstetrical complications with the appropriate drug therapy.
    4. Have an appreciation of the changes that occur in the pediatric and be able to modify drug therapies to accommodate the pediatric patient.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with the drugs that are commonly prescribed in frequently occurring medical conditions, factoring their presence into the patient’s management plan.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the actions of commonly prescribed drugs.
    2. Deduce the patient’s medical condition and predict possible drug interactions when presented with the patient’s prescription.
    3. Manage the patient who has misused his/her prescribed medication.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Drug Administration Review

    Module 2: Pediatric Obstetric and Gynecological Pharmacology

    Module 3: Medical Emergency Pharmacology

    Module 4: Environmental Emergency Pharmacology

    Module 5: ACLS Pharmacology


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2580 - Paramedic Lab 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2530  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: EMSA 2560 , EMSA 2570 , and EMSA 2612  

    (formerly EMTC 2580)

    Practical applications for Paramedic Lecture 3 and 4.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will refine his/her management of the cardiac patient.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Refine then naturalize the cardiac assessment.
    2. Be able to identify the EKG when provided with both dynamic and static strips.
    3. Correctly manage the cardiac patient, efficiently incorporating basic procedures, drug therapies, and advanced diagnostic evaluations.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to provide total patient management for any patient condition that has been covered by the core material.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Refine then naturalize the ability to select then conduct the appropriate focused assessment.
    2. Practice delivering the correct patient management for any patient condition covered by the core material.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will prepare and/or practice for subsequent practical evaluations.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Become proficient at current ACLS algorithms.
    2. Practice licensing practical exam stations in preparation for subsequent licensing exam.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Total Patient Management

    Module 2: ACLS Preparation

    Module 3: Licensing Practical Examination Prep


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2600 - Advanced Life Support Internship

    Credit Hours: 6.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    (formerly EMTC 2600)

    Internship with a paramedic in an out-of-hospital environment. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 9

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will meet National Standard Curriculum requirements for contact hours and skills.

    Objectives:
    The student will

    1. Demonstrate that the National Standard Curriculum requirements includes a set number of EMS patient interactions and EMS hours that has not been possible in hospital.
    2. National Standard Curriculum requirements for EMS hours and skills.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize the life skills of professionalism, punctuality, integrity, and interpersonal communications with the intention of developing an excellent working situation and patient rapport.

    Objectives:
    The student will

    1. Appear professionally and appropriately dressed and be prepared for all clinical rotations.
    2. Attend all scheduled clinical rotations, and be in the appropriate EMS unit, ready to work, in a punctual manner.
    3. Handle any absences or schedule changes in a manner that would be perceived by any agency as professional, honest, and courteous.
    4. Treat any agency employee, mentor, or manager as a direct supervisor, and as such is professional, honest, and courteous.
    5. Assure that all patient interactions are done in the best interest of the patient

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate a readiness to perform as an entry level paramedic, and a preparedness to successfully complete the appropriate licensing exam process.

    Objectives:
    The student will

    1. Document an appropriate number of successful patient interactions, as evaluated by self, faculty, and internship preceptors.
    2. Demonstrate an adequate cognitive knowledge base, efficacious decision making, and professional affect in an oral interview with the program’s Physician Director.
    3. Achieve a satisfactory score in a program identified series of formated cognitive exams which are designed to simulate the actual licensing exam.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: EMS Rotations
    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2605 - Clinical Skills for Hospital Rotations

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Corequisites: EMSA 2611  

    Skills and assessments will be presented to prepare students to have a successful clinical hospital rotation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, through the assessment process the student will identify the correct field‐impression of a real or simulated patient.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will identify the steps of the medical and trauma assessment.
    2. The students will explain the steps of the medical and trauma assessment.
    3. The student will incorporate advanced techniques at the appropriate place in the assessment process.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the students will incorporate advanced airway techniques at the appropriate point in patient management.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will properly demonstrate basic techniques for airway control.
    2. The student will identify the proper steps of endotracheal intubation
    3. The student will explain the proper steps of endotracheal intubation
    4. The student will identify the circumstances surrounding the need to employ a surgical technique for airway maintenance

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate proper techniques for drug and fluid administration.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to correctly utilize the IV, IM, Sub‐Q routes for drug administration.
    2. The students will identify the proper steps of parenteral drug and fluid administration.
    3. The students will explain the proper steps of parenteral drug and fluid administration.
    4. The student will correctly identify the appropriate drug therapies and administration routes
    5. The student will correctly identify non‐parenteral drug therapies
    6. The student will explain the practices regarding the storing, and restocking of drugs as well as the documentation of their administration.

    Outcome 4:
    Students will appropriately operate the EKG/defibrillator.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will be able to perform normal EKG function and maintenance.
    2. The student will be able to safely and correctly perform a defibrillation in a pulseless V‐Tach or V‐fib cardiac rhythm.
    3. The student will be able to safely and correctly perform a synchronized cardioversion in a tachycardic rhythm with a pulse.
    4. The student will be able to safely and correctly implement the technique of transcutaneous pacing in an unstable bradycardic patient.
    5. The student will identify dynamic cardiac rhythms on the EKG monitor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Class 1

    1. Course introduction
      1. Testing process
      2. Requirements
        1. Each student must pass the skills presented
        2. Each student must participate in scenarios
      3. Each student must be evaluated every skill & scenarios a minimum of TWO times.
        The instructor (or lab aid) must evaluate each student on every skill/scenario
    2. Patient assessment review
      1. Assessments
    3. Basic skills review
      1. EMT skills
      2. CPR skills
    4. Testing
      1. Skills
      2. Format

    Class 2

    1. Scenario‐based education
    2. Medical scenarios
    3. Trauma scenarios
    4. Skills practice
    5. Test out
      1. Trauma scenarios

    Class 3

    1. Review of previous material
    2. Cardiac patient assessment
    3. Cardiac patient skills
    4. Testing
      1. Cardiac scenarios

    Class 4

    1. Patient management
    2. Puħng it all together
      1. Scenario driven
        1. Team leader
        2. Team member
      2. Testing
        1. Medical/trauma scenarios
    3. All students will have tested out in all of the required skills and scenarios

    Primary Faculty
    Media, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2611 - Hospital Clinical Rotation for the Paramedic

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Permission of instructor

    Corequisites: EMSA 2605  

    In-hospital clinical rotation class offered first semester. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 5

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate appropriateness for the clinical environment by providing the program, department, and/or hospital with the necessary documentation.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Document his/her readiness for the clinical environment through demonstration of selected pre‐clinical competencies.
    2. Complete any hospital‐required documentation before beginning any clinical rotation.
    3. Provide the Health and Human Services Department with a drug screen and criminal background check before beginning any clinical.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will begin to meet National Standard Curriculum requirements for contact hours and skills.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Appreciate that the National Standard Curriculum requirements for hospital hours and skills must be met by the completion of EMSA‐2611 and EMSA‐2612.
    2. Begin to meet the National Standard Curriculum requirements for hospital hours and skills.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will utilize the life‐skills of professionalism, punctuality, integrity, and interpersonal communications with the intention of developing an excellent working situation and patient rapport.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Appear professionally and appropriately dressed and be prepared for all clinical rotations
    2. Attend all scheduled clinical rotations, and be in the appropriate department, ready to work, in a punctual manner.
    3. Handle any absences or schedule changes in a manner that would be perceived by any clinical facility as professional, honest, and courteous.
    4. Treat any clinical preceptor, manager, or department employee as a direct supervisor, and as such is professional, honest, and courteous.
    5. Assure that all patient interactions are done in the best interest of the patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Pre‐clinical competencies
    Module 2: Hospital and Department Requirements
    Module 3: Hospital Rotations
    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2612 - Hospital Clinical Rotation for the Paramedic 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2611  

    Corequisites: EMSA 2560 EMSA 2570 , and EMSA 2580  

    (formerly EMSA 2610)

    In-hospital clinical rotation class offered second semester. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will begin to meet National Standard Curriculum requirements for contact hours and skills.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate that the National Standard Curriculum requirements for hospital hours and skills must be met by the completion of EMSA‐2611 and EMSA‐2612.
    2. Meet the National Standard Curriculum requirements for hospital hours and skills.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize the life‐skills of professionalism, punctuality, integrity, and interpersonal communications with the intention of developing an excellent working situation and patient rapport.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Appear professionally and appropriately dressed and be prepared for all clinical rotations.
    2. Attend all scheduled clinical rotations, and be in the appropriate department, ready to work, in a punctual manner.
    3. Handle any absences or schedule changes in a manner that would be perceived by any clinical facility as professional, honest, and courteous.
    4. Treat any clinical preceptor, manager, or department employee as a direct supervisor, and as such is professional, honest, and courteous.
    5. Assure that all patient interactions are done in the best interest of the patient.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: Hospital Rotations
    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • EMSA 2620 - Paramedic Lecture 4

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: EMSA 2560  with grade C or better

    (formerly EMTC 2620)

    12-lead EKG and Advanced Cardiac Life Support for the Paramedic.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will define coronary artery disease as it pertains to the patient presentation and management.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define Coronary Artery Disease and the mechanisms that precipitate angina and the Acute Coronary Syndromes (ACS).
    2. Be able to assess the patient for significant risk factors for Angina and ACS.
    3. Identify significant findings in the patient with typical, atypical presentations as well as those with an anginal equivalent.
    4. Provide correct treatment for the cardiac patient.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to incorporate 12‐lead EKG into the management of the cardiac or suspected cardiac patient.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Interpret the lead placement for the chest, limb, and augmented leads as well as interpret their output.
    2. Describe that the primary function of the 12‐lead EKG is to detect ischemia or myocardial cell damage.
    3. Identify abnormalities in the cardiac cycle that may suggest ischemia or myocardial cell damage.
    4. Identify cardiac abnormalities that may mask or mimic a myocardial infarction.
    5. Be able to perform an appropriate cardiac assessment, prioritize the use of the 12 lead EKG, treat, and make appropriate transport decisions.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to acquire certification in Advanced Cardiac Life Support (ACLS).

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate a proficiency in managing the critical cardiac patient and the patient in cardiac or respiratory arrest.
    2. Correctly identify several critical cardiac dysrythmias.
    3. Be able to apply current ACLS standards in a psychomotor examination.
    4. Be able to apply current ACLS standards in a written examination.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Module 1: The 12‐Lead EKG

    Module 2: Preparation for and the administration of pseudo‐licensing examinations

    Module 3: Advanced Cardiac Life Support


    Primary Faculty
    Armstrong, David
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Lopez, Michael
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


English

  
  • ENGL 0055 - Writing Essentials

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Placement

    (formerly ENGL 0050)

    Extensive work with punctuation, sentence and paragraph structure. Designed as preparatory for successful work in freshman composition courses.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to develop a paragraph in at least five different ways: argumentation, illustration/exemplification, classification, description, process, comparison, contrast, cause, effect, definition, narration.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and create topic sentences.
    2. Identify and create appropriate supporting evidence.
    3. Organize effectively.
    4. Identify and use appropriate transitional words and phrases.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to draft, revise, and edit at least one essay of about 500 words.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Write an introductory paragraph with thesis and plan of development.
    2. Write supporting paragraphs with topic sentences.
    3. Organize supporting paragraphs with an appropriate organizational strategy.
    4. Employ transitions from supporting paragraph to supporting paragraph.
    5. Write an effective concluding paragraph.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to communicate in Standard Written English at a level appropriate for students entering ENGL1180 or ENGL1210.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Write simple, compound, and complex sentences.
    2. Use consistent point of view.
    3. Avoid subjectverb agreement errors.
    4. Use verb tense consistently.
    5. Use punctuation correctly.
    6. Spell proficiently.
    7. Choose appropriate vocabulary.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Four Bases
      1. Unity
        1. Writing is focused through the use of topic sentences and thesis statements.
      2. Support
        1. Writing is focused through the use of large ideas and specific details.
      3. Coherence
        1. Writing is organized.
        2. Writing is connected by transitions.
      4. Sentence Skills
        1. Writing exhibits appropriate command of the conventions of Standard Written English.
        2. Writing exhibits sentence variety.
    2. Paragraph Development
      1. Different approaches (five minimum)
      2. Unity
        1. Paragraphs begin with a controlling idea
      3. Support
        1. Paragraphs develop support by big ideas and specific details
      4. Coherence
        1. Paragraphs are organized effectively
        2. Paragraphs are connected with appropriate transitions
    3. Essay Development
      1. Introduction
        1. Introduction begins with background, motivation, qualifications, etc.
        2. Background information leads to controlling idea.
        3. Introduction provides a preview of the essay’s development and organization.
      2. Body Paragraphs
        1. Paragraphs lead with topic sentences.
        2. Paragraphs contain appropriate development.
        3. Paragraphs are effectively organized.
        4. Paragraphs use transitions to connect ideas.
      3. Conclusion

    Primary Faculty
    Bily, Cynthia
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 1180 - Communications 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Placement, or ENGL 0055   or EAPP 1500  with grade C‑ or better

    No credit after ENGL 1210. The focus of this course is college-level expository and argumentative writing. This course places extensive emphasis on organization and development of essays along with the study of grammar and mechanics. This course develops competence in English sentence elements and skill in organizing, proofreading, and revising essays. Students who have completed ENGL 1210  successfully should NOT take ENGL 1180. Students will NOT receive credit for both.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use various forms of discourse, such as narration, description, exposition, and argument.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write full essays that incorporate a controlling idea stated in an introduction, developed in the essay, and summarized in a conclusion.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write sentences that are reasonably free of run ons, comma splices, fragments, and agreement errors, and will demonstrate a satisfactory mastery of standard spelling, diction, and usage.

    Objectives:

    In the final essays written for the course the student should be able to fulfill the following requirements:

    1. Include an introduction that coherently leads to a statement of the main idea (thesis) of the essay.
    2. Paragraph the essay by a logical plan (e.g. by general steps to a process, by causes, by effects, etc.).
    3. Link the body paragraphs by transitions, repetition, leading sentences, or parallelism.
    4. Include topic sentences that accurately state the subdivisions or supporting generalizations of the essay’s main idea.
    5. Include in body paragraphs only that development which is governed by the topic sentence.
    6. Use examples, details, definitions, or comparisons to develop the paragraph.
    7. Include a conclusion that either restates the main idea or summarizes the subtopics or suggests the implications of the subject.
    8. Avoid sentence structure errors (awkwardness, comma splices, fused sentences, fragments, misplaced modifiers, faulty parallelism, illogical subordination).
    9. Avoid grammatical errors (agreement, case, pronoun reference, verb forms).
    10. Maintain a consistent point of view.
    11. Apply the conventions of punctuation (commas, semi‐colons, colons, apostrophes, italics, quotation marks).
    12. Avoid misspellings.
    13. Maintain an appropriate level of diction.
    14. Use conventional manuscript form.
    15. Abide by deadlines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Organization of Essays
      1. Introduction
        1. Definition of Introduction
        2. Function of Introduction
        3. Tone in the Introduction
        4. Definition and function of thesis
        5. Scope of thesis
        6. Relationship of the thesis to the organizational structure of the essay
        7. Placement of thesis in Introduction
        8. Length of introduction
      2. Middle paragraphs
        1. Definition and function of topic sentences
        2. Placement of topic sentences in paragraph
        3. Relationship of middle paragraphs to the introduction and to the thesis
        4. Length of middle paragraphs
      3. Conclusion
        1. Function of the conclusion
        2. Length of the conclusion
    2. Development of Essays
      1. Patterns of development
        1. Exposition (required)
          1. causation
          2. classification
          3. definition
          4. analogy
          5. comparison
          6. illustration
          7. process analysis
        2. Narration
        3. Argumentation
        4. Description
          1. Transitions
          2. Define and illustrate adequate detail
          3. Define and illustrate specific detail
          4. Define devices of emphasis
          5. Sentence variety
    3. Grammar and Punctuation
      1. Define and illustrate fragments
      2. Identify ways of correcting fragments
      3. Define and illustrate run‐ons
      4. Identify ways of correcting run‐ons
      5. Define and illustrate comma splices
      6. Identify ways of correcting comma splices
      7. Identify common usage errors and illustrate ways of correcting them.
      8. Require standard spelling in essays
      9. Show students how to use spelling checkers and grammar checkers in Word or other word processing programs
      10. Point out problems and cautions with using these checkers
      11. Define and illustrate agreement errors (subject‐verb; pronoun‐antecedent)
      12. Identify ways of correcting agreement errors.
      13. Define and illustrate simple, complex, and compound sentences
      14. Illustrate the use of each type of sentence
      15. Explain the connection of sentence type to logic (i.e. compound sentences are used for ideas of equal importance; complex sentences subordinate less important ideas).
      16. Define, illustrate, and explain when to use parallel structure
      17. Encourage the development of vocabulary and precision in word choice
      18. Explain denotation and connotation
      19. Define trite phrasing, jargon, slang, euphemism, and vulgarity suggesting ways to avoid or correct these problems
      20. Define and illustrate figurative language

    Primary Faculty
    Ragan, Mary
    Secondary Faculty
    McGee, Nancy
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 1190 - Communications 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210 

    No credit after ENGL 1220. The focus of this course is to continue the development of writing skills learned in ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210 . This course places extensive emphasis upon research and documentation. Students who have completed ENGL 1220  successfully should NOT take ENGL 1190. Students will NOT receive credit for both.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to produce a formal research paper that is explanatory, analytical, or persuasive.

    Objectives:

    1. Include an introduction that directly states the purpose of the report.
    2. Divide the body of the report into logical sections.
    3. Paragraph the report logically.
    4. State the topic sentences of the body paragraphs precisely.
    5. Include in the body paragraphs only such development as is governed by the controlling idea or topic sentence.
    6. Link body paragraphs and sentences within paragraphs by a variety of transitional devices.
    7. Document sources used according to acceptable MLA or APA format.
    8. Avoid sentence structure errors, grammatical errors, usage errors, and misspellings.
    9. Apply the conventions of punctuation (including those needed for the research paper).
    10. Use appropriate manuscript form.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate skills in applied composition, in applied argument or technical/career writing, or both.

    Objectives:

    1. Structure an argumentative essay using evidence and refuting the arguments of the opposition. AND/OR Clarify technical, scientific, professional subject matter for an unspecialized audience, developing persuasive reports and proposals that are lucid, effectively arranged, professionally precise, and accurate, that smoothly integrate statistical and graphic information into the written reports and proposals, and that competently research and document scientific, technical, and professional material.
    2. Include sufficient development of the subject so that targeted audiences can understand the report.
    3. Use appropriate types of support and arrange these in their most logical position.
    4. Maintain a tone appropriate to the targeted audience.
    5. Arrange main points effectively.
    6. Locate appropriate source materials for the major report.
    7. Support main points with primary and secondary evidence or both.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Academic Writing (2 or more of the following):
      1. Interviews and Surveys
      2. Research Proposals
      3. Outlines and Abstracts
    2. Conducting Research
      1. Choosing a Topic.
      2. Targeting an Audience.
      3. Assembling a Working Bibliography.
        1. Appropriate Source Materials
        2. Research Tools and Methods
        3. Credibility of Sources
      4. Taking Notes.
    3. Writing Research Papers.
      1. Shaping a Controlling Idea.
        1. Introduction and Purpose
        2. Appropriate Tone and Language
      2. Developing the Controlling Idea.
        1. Appropriate Types of Support
        2. Primary and Secondary Evidence
        3. Refutation
      3. Organizing the Research Paper.
        1. Main Points
        2. Paragraph.
        3. Topic Sentences
        4. Transitions
      4. Using and Citing Sources (MLA and/or APA format).
        1. Avoiding Plagiarism.
        2. MLA and/or APA Format and Documentation

    Primary Faculty
    Goossen, Carroll
    Secondary Faculty
    Brinker, Ludger
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 1210 - Composition 1

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Placement, or  ENGL 0055   or EAPP 1500  with grade C‑ or better

    No credit after ENGL 1180. The focus of this course is the writing of expository and argumentative essays. This course emphasizes logical development of ideas and refinement of personal style. Students who have completed ENGL 1180 successfully should NOT take ENGL 1210. Students will NOT receive credit for both.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use various forms of discourse, such as narration, description, exposition, and argument.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write full essays that incorporate a controlling idea stated in an introduction, developed in the essay, and summarized in a conclusion.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to write sentences that are reasonably free of run-ons, comma splices, fragments, and agreement errors, and will demonstrate a satisfactory mastery of standard spelling, diction, and usage.

    Objectives:
    In the final essays written for the course the student should be able to fulfill the following requirements:

    1. Include an introduction that coherently leads to a statement of the main idea (thesis) of the essay.
    2. Paragraph the essay by a logical plan (e.g. by general steps to a process, by causes, by effects, etc.).
    3. Link the body paragraphs by transitions, repetition, leading sentences, or parallelism.
    4. Include topic sentences that accurately state the subdivisions or supporting generalizations of the essay’s main idea.
    5. Include in body paragraphs only that development which is governed by the topic sentence.
    6. Use examples, details, definitions, or comparisons to develop the paragraph.
    7. Include a conclusion that either restates the main idea or summarizes the subtopics or suggests the implications of the subject.
    8. Avoid sentence structure errors (awkwardness, comma splices, fused sentences, fragments, misplaced modifiers, faulty parallelism, illogical subordination).
    9. Avoid grammatical errors (agreement, case, pronoun reference, verb forms).
    10. Maintain a consistent point of view.
    11. Apply the conventions of punctuation (commas, semi‐colons, colons, apostrophes, italics, quotation marks).
    12. Avoid misspellings.
    13. Maintain an appropriate level of diction.
    14. Use conventional manuscript form.
    15. Abide by deadlines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Organization of Essays
      1. Introduction
        1. Definition of Introduction
        2. Function of Introduction
        3. Tone in the Introduction
        4. Definition and function of thesis
        5. Scope of thesis
        6. Relationship of the thesis to the organizational structure of the essay
        7. Placement of thesis in Introduction
        8. Length of introduction
      2. Middle paragraphs
        1. Definition and function of topic sentences
        2. Placement of topic sentences in paragraph
        3. Relationship of middle paragraphs to the introduction and to the thesis
        4. Length of middle paragraphs
      3. Conclusion
        1. Function of the conclusion
        2. Length of the conclusion
    2. Development of Essays
      1. Patterns of development
        1. Exposition (required)
          1. causation
          2. classification
          3. definition
          4. analogy
          5. comparison
          6. illustration
          7. process analysis
        2. Narration
        3. Argumentation
        4. Description
      2. Transitions
      3. Define and illustrate adequate detail
      4. Define and illustrate specific detail
      5. Define devices of emphasis
      6. Sentence variety
    3. Grammar and Punctuation
      1. Define and illustrate fragments
      2. Identify ways of correcting fragments
      3. Define and illustrate run‐ons
      4. Identify ways of correcting run‐ons
      5. Define and illustrate comma splices
      6. Identify ways of correcting comma splices
      7. Identify common usage errors and illustrate ways of correcting them.
      8. Require standard spelling in essays
      9. Show students how to use spelling checkers and grammar checkers in Word or other word processing programs
      10. Point out problems and cautions with using these checkers
      11. Define and illustrate agreement errors (subject‐verb; pronoun‐antecedent)
      12. Identify ways of correcting agreement errors.
      13. Define and illustrate simple, complex, and compound sentences
      14. Illustrate the use of each type of sentence
      15. Explain the connection of sentence type to logic (i.e. compound sentences are used for ideas of equal importance; complex sentences subordinate less important ideas).
      16. Define, illustrate, and explain when to use parallel structure
      17. Encourage the development of vocabulary and precision in word choice
      18. Explain denotation and connotation
      19. Define trite phrasing, jargon, slang, euphemism, and vulgarity suggesting ways to avoid or correct these problems
      20. Define and illustrate figurative language

    Primary Faculty
    Brender, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    McGee, Nancy
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 1220 - Composition 2

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1180  or ENGL 1210  

    No credit after ENGL 1190. The focus of this course is the writing of critical essays based upon readings in literature, and the further development of writing skills learned in ENGL 1180 or ENGL 1210. The course places extensive emphasis upon research. Students who have completed ENGL 1190 successfully should NOT take ENGL 1220. Students will NOT receive credit for both.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course the student will be able to discuss the significance of imaginative writing in essays that employ concepts and terminology appropriate to literature and its conventional genres.

    Objectives:

    1. Provide at least a rudimentary explanation of the nature of imaginative literature as a vital, creative human activity.
    2. Define a given genre and distinguish it from the other(s).
    3. Identify and explain the apparent attitude of the author towards characters, events, and the audience as well as the principal means used to convey it.
    4. Distinguish kinds of characters in a work of literature by noting the manner of their presentation by a writer and their function in the plot.
    5. Write a statement of the central idea that he or she sees as inherent in a literary work and discuss how the chief details of the work support that statement.
    6. Where it is appropriate and depending on the nature of a particular literary work, discuss those elements of plot that make it successful as entertainment as well as effective in conveying meaning to a reader.
    7. Recognize and discuss the conventions employed by authors writing in a particular genre.
    8. Explain a writer’s intentional departure from the normal ordering, construction, meaning, or use of language for literary purposes.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course the student will be able to continue to write full essays that incorporate a controlling idea stated in an introduction, developed in the essay, and summarized in a conclusion (as English-1220 is part of a sequence of composition courses).

    Objectives:

    1. Write full essays that express a controlling idea in an introduction.
    2. Develop the controlling idea in the body of the essay.
    3. Summarize the controlling idea in the conclusion of the essay.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course the student will be able to produce a formal research paper that is explanatory, analytical, or persuasive.

    Objectives:

    1. Choose an appropriate topic for the research paper.
    2. Assemble a working bibliography for the research paper.
    3. Demonstrate proficiency in note‐taking skills.
    4. Shape a controlling idea for the research paper and develop it in detail.
    5. Select and use a method of organization appropriate to the purpose of the research.
    6. Use and cite sources in the research paper.
    7. Prepare a research paper(s) that conforms to the standards of the MLA format.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. The Worth of Literature
    2. Literary Genres (2 or more of the following):
      1. Fiction
      2. Poetry
      3. Drama
    3. The Features of Literature
      1. Authorial Persona
      2. Characterization
      3. Thematic Idea
      4. Story Line
      5. Literary Conventions
      6. Figurative Language
    4. Writing Research Papers
      1. Choosing Topics
      2. Assembling a Working Bibliography
      3. Taking Notes
      4. Shaping a Controlling Idea
      5. Developing the Controlling Idea
      6. Organizing the Research Paper
      7. Using and Citing Sources (MLA Format)

    Primary Faculty
    Schouman, Donna
    Secondary Faculty
    Goossen, Carroll
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 1730 - Contemporary American Literature

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Reading of American works which are currently influencing and defining thought and art, as a means of introducing stimulating writers and books. Emphasis on discussion and critical analysis.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the core elements within a work of contemporary American literature.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will assess the quality of literary works through criteria based on core elements.
    2. Within a written report and/or classroom discussion, students will employ core elements such as theme, characterization, plot structure, literary devices, setting, and tone to analyze textual concepts.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the interaction between American history, culture and literature.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will identify the historical, cultural, and literary implications of various works of literature.
    2. Within a written report and/or classroom discussion, students will analyze the relationship between historical and cultural contexts of the literature, and of the period.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the function of literary criticism.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will analyze and interpret works of literature using literary criticism.
    2. Students will write at least one formal essay using literary criticism.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Literary elements
      1. Theme: Identify important themes.
      2. Characterization: Identify methods of characterization.
      3. Plot Structure: Identify exposition, conflict, and resolution.
      4. Literary Devices: Identify symbolism, metaphor, simile, figures of speech, imagery, and irony.
      5. Setting: Identify the historical, geographical and physical setting.
      6. Tone: Identify characteristics that develop tone in an American literary work
    2. Historical Framework: Identify and analyze historical references within the text.
    3. Cultural framework: Identify and analyze cultural allusions within the text.
    4. Literary Criticism: Use critical interpretations to identify and evaluate literary elements, historical references, and cultural allusions

    Primary Faculty
    Young, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Peller, Scott
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 2000 - Introduction to Literature

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1190  or ENGL 1220  

    This course will provide a survey of literatures in English as well as serve as an introduction to literary analysis and criticism. The primary focus of the course will be on short prose, poetry, and drama.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:

    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify conventions of literary texts, as well as of secondary texts focused on literary criticism.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will learn the differences among genres such as fiction, creative nonfiction, poetry, and drama.
    2. Students will learn to analyze a given text in the context of its genre.

    Outcome 2:

    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to employ the conventions of literary criticism in writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will learn to analyze a text rather than merely summarizing.
    2. Students will learn to make arguments about a text supported mainly by evidence from the text itself.
    3. Students will learn to correctly employ literary terminology, including but not limited to: character types, plot devices, themes, and symbolism.

    Outcome 3:

    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce a formal literary research paper.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will learn to differentiate scholarly from non-scholarly sources.
    2. Students will learn to effectively utilize research databases.
    3. Students will learn to incorporate professional scholarship into their essays to support their own ideas using correct MLA format.
    4. Students will apply one or more of the critical theories from the class in their research paper.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    The course is intended to be a survey of literatures in English, and hence should attempt to include at least one work from each of the following periods or movements: Elizabethan, romanticism, modernism, post-modernism, world literature, and contemporary.

    1. Literature. What is literature? What are its features and purposes?
    2. Prose fiction.
      1. Characterization
      2. Plot
      3. Setting
      4. Theme
      5. Symbolism
    3. Poetry.
      1. Poetic devices
      2. Speaker and voice
      3. Theme and mood
      4. Sound techniques
      5. Rhythm and meter
    4. Drama.
      1. Historical origins
      2. Dramatic terminology
      3. Stage directions and staging techniques
      4. Plot structure
    5. Criticism.
      1. Using the library databases
      2. Reading professional criticism
      3. Incorporating quotes and paraphrases

    Primary Faculty
    Olivarez, Emilio
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 2410 - Creative Writing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1220  or ENGL 1190  or consent of instructor

    Course primarily in writing the short story and poetry with emphasis on creation of personal imaginative work.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to read literature critically.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify standard conventions in short stories.
    2. Identify standard conventions in poems.
    3. Analyze deviations from standard conventions.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to critique other writers’ work for technical elements of fiction and poetry.

    Objectives:

    1. Define technical elements.
    2. Identify technical elements in the works.
    3. Analyze the use of technical elements in the works.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to build upon a body of original work.

    Objectives:

    1. Create varied works of fiction.
    2. Create varied poems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    To be followed in general; chronology not defined:

    1. Fiction
      1. Read, discuss and assess at least 12 works of short, literary fiction, with attention to elements of fiction such as plot, setting, character, dialogue, etc.
      2. Write short fiction.
      3. Edit student work in workshops.
      4. Revise own work individually and in workshops.
    2. Poetry
      1. Read, discuss and assess at least 15 poems, with attention to elements of poetry such as word choice and play, cadence, line, rhyme, meter, etc.
      2. Write poems.
      3. Edit student w ork in workshops.
      4. Revise own work individually and in workshops.
    3. Other Genres
      1. Read, discuss a nd assess other forms of creative writing (screen‐ and playwriting, creative nonfiction, etc.) as appropriate.

    Primary Faculty
    Iverson, Clark
    Secondary Faculty
    Young, James
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ENGL 2420 - Advanced Creative Writing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 2410  or consent of instructor

    Course designed for the experienced writer who has developed the fundamentals taught in ENGL 2410. Revising and marketing manuscripts will be covered.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to build a polished body of written creative work.

    Objectives:

    1. Create works of fiction
    2. Create poetry
    3. Create plays/screenplays

    Outcome 2:
    Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to critique other writers’ work for technical elements of creative writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Define technical elements
    2. Identify technical elements in creative works
    3. Analyze the use of technical elements in creative works

    Outcome 3:
    Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to participate in the process of preparing a manuscript for submission.

    Objectives:

    1. Edit creative works
    2. Revise in response to editorial prompts
    3. Submit work for publication

    Outcome 4:
    Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to read literature critically.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify standard conventions in fiction
    2. Identify standard conventions in poetry
    3. Identify standard conventions in playwriting
    4. Analyze deviations from convention standards

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    To be followed in general; chronology not defined.

    1. Fiction
      1. Read, discuss, and assess a number of works of short literary fiction
      2. Read, discuss, and assess a number of works of longer works of short literary fiction
      3. Write short fiction
      4. Edit student work in workshops
      5. Revise own work individually and in workshops
      6. Submit manuscripts for publication
    2. Poetry
      1. Read, discuss, and assess a number of poems
      2. Write poems
      3. Edit student work in workshops
      4. Revise own work individually and in workshops
      5. Submit manuscripts for publication
    3. Other Genres
      1. Read, discuss, and assess other forms of creative writing (screen‐ and playwriting, creative nonfiction,graphic novels, etc.) as appropriate.

    Primary Faculty
    Bily, Cynthia
    Secondary Faculty
    Young, James
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10